0% found this document useful (0 votes)

44 views306 pages

Thiết bị Access Switch

Uploaded by

Dan Nguyen The

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

44 views306 pages

Thiết bị Access Switch

Uploaded by

Dan Nguyen The

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 306

EX3400 Switch Hardware Guide

Published

2024-05-27
ii

Juniper Networks, Inc.

1133 Innovation Way
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net

Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, Juniper, and Junos are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc.
in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks, service marks, registered marks, or registered service
marks are the property of their respective owners.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right
to change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

EX3400 Switch Hardware Guide

The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related
limitations through the year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use
with) Juniper Networks software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License
Agreement ("EULA") posted at https://support.juniper.net/support/eula/. By downloading, installing or using such
software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA.
iii

Table of Contents
About This Guide | ix

1 Overview
EX3400 System Overview | 2

EX3400 Switches Hardware Overview | 2

EX3400 Switch Models | 5

EX3400 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 7

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 10

Field-Replaceable Units in EX3400 Switches | 12

EX3400 Chassis | 12

Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch | 13

Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch | 14

Chassis Status LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 16

Management Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 18

RJ-45 Network Port and Uplink Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 20

EX3400 Cooling System | 24

EX3400 Power System | 28

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 28

AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 29

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 31

DC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 33

DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 35

Power Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 37

2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400 Switches | 40
iv

EX3400 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 44

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches | 44

General Site Guidelines | 51

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines | 51

Rack Requirements | 52

Cabinet Requirements | 54

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55

EX3400 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 59

Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX3400 Switches | 59

SFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches | 60

QSFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches | 63

Overview of EX Series Switches: Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion | 64

Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for EX Series Devices | 66

Calculating the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for EX Series Devices | 67

EX3400 Management Cable Specifications and Pinouts | 69

Management Cable Specifications | 69

Console Port Connector Pinout Information | 70

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information | 71

USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch | 72

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port Connector Pinout Information | 73

SFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch | 79

QSFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch | 81

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information | 84

EX3400 Virtual Chassis | 85

Planning EX3400 Virtual Chassis | 85

Understanding EX3400 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration | 86

Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX3400 Switches | 86

3 Initial Installation and Configuration

Unpacking and Mounting the EX3400 Switch | 91

Unpacking an EX3400 Switch | 91

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX3400 Switch | 92

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs | 93

Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch | 93

Installing and Removing EX3400 Switch Hardware Components | 94

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface | 95

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet | 96

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet | 100

Mounting an EX3400 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet | 103

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Wall | 104

Connecting the EX3400 to Power | 107

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 108

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119

Connecting the EX3400 to External Devices | 122

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 123

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector | 123

Connect an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Using the Mini-USB Type-B Console
Port | 125

Connecting the EX3400 to the Network | 127

Install a Transceiver | 127

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 130

Configuring Junos OS on the EX3400 | 131

EX3400 Switch Default Configuration | 131

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) | 156

Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch | 159

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the request system
zeroize Command | 161

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the load factory-
default Command | 161
Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the EX Series Switch LCD Panel | 162

Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the Factory Reset/Mode button on

EX2300, EX3400, and EX4300-48MP Switches | 163

Dashboard for EX Series Switches | 164

4 Maintaining Components
Maintaining the EX3400 Switch Cooling System | 202

Removing a Fan Module from an EX3400 Switch | 202

Installing a Fan Module in an EX3400 Switch | 203

Maintaining the EX3400 Power System | 205

Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch | 205

Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch | 206

Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch | 208

Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch | 210

Maintaining a Transceiver | 211

Install a Transceiver | 212

Remove a Transceiver | 215

Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables | 218

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 218

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 219

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables | 220

5 Troubleshooting Hardware
Troubleshooting EX3400 Components | 222
vii

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches | 222

Chassis Component Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches | 224

Check Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface | 227

Monitor System Log Messages | 228

Troubleshooting PoE Voltage Injection Failure in EX2300, EX3400, EX4300, or EX4400 Switch
Models with PoE Capability | 235

Troubleshooting Storage Issues While Upgrading Junos OS in EX2300 and EX3400 Switches | 236

Troubleshoot Temperature Alarms in EX Series Switches | 238

6 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or Components

Returning an EX3400 Chassis or Components | 247

Returning an EX3400 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement | 247

Locating the Serial Number on an EX3400 Switch or Component | 248

Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI | 248

Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3400 Switch | 249

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization | 250

Packing an EX3400 Switch or Component for Shipping | 251

Packing a Switch for Shipping | 251

Packing Switch Components for Shipping | 252

7 Safety and Compliance Information

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 255

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels | 256

Qualified Personnel Warning | 258

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden | 258

Fire Safety Requirements | 259

Installation Instructions Warning | 260

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines | 261

Restricted Access Warning | 261

viii

Ramp Warning | 263

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263

Grounded Equipment Warning | 267

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 268

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning | 271

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 272

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 278

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident | 279

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage | 280

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 281

AC Power Disconnection Warning | 282

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 283

DC Power Disconnection Warning | 284

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning | 288

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning | 289

TN Power Warning | 290

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches | 291

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches | 293

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches | 297

About This Guide

Use this guide to install hardware and perform initial software configuration, routine maintenance, and
troubleshooting for the EX3400 switch. After completing the installation and basic configuration
procedures covered in this guide, refer to the Junos OS documentation for information about further
software configuration.
1 CHAPTER

Overview

EX3400 System Overview | 2

EX3400 Chassis | 12

EX3400 Cooling System | 24

EX3400 Power System | 28

EX3400 System Overview

IN THIS SECTION

EX3400 Switches Hardware Overview | 2

EX3400 Switch Models | 5

EX3400 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 7

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 10

Field-Replaceable Units in EX3400 Switches | 12

EX3400 Switches Hardware Overview

IN THIS SECTION

Benefits of the EX3400 Switch | 3

EX3400 Switches First View | 3

Uplink Ports | 3

Virtual Chassis | 4

Console Ports | 4

Power over Ethernet Ports | 4

Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches provide scalable connectivity for the enterprise market,
including branch offices, campus locations, and data centers. The switches run the Juniper Networks
Junos operating system (Junos OS), which provides Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching, routing, and security
services.

Juniper Networks EX3400 Ethernet Switches provide connectivity for low-density environments.
3

Benefits of the EX3400 Switch

High flexibility—EX3400 switches provide a flexible solution that supports converged data, voice, and
video environments.

Support for MACsec—EX3400 switches support IEEE 802.1AE MACsec, providing support for link-layer
data confidentiality, data integrity, and data origin authentication. The MACsec feature enables EX3400
to support 88 Gbps of near line-rate hardware-based traffic encryption on all Gigabit Ethernet and
10 Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Nondisruptive software upgrades—EX3400 switches feature a resilient operating system that supports
high availability (HA) features such as graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES), nonstop active routing
(NSR), and nonstop software upgrade (NSSU), providing software upgrades and changes without
disrupting network traffic.

EX3400 Switches First View

EX3400 switches provide:

• Either 24 or 48 RJ-45 ports (labeled 0 through 23 or 0 through 47) that support 10/100/1000BASE-
T Gigabit Ethernet connectors.

• Four uplink ports (labeled 0 through 3 on the front panel) that support small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) transceivers and small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+) transceivers, and two 40-Gigabit
Ethernet ports (labeled 0 through 1 on the rear panel) that support quad small form-factor pluggable
plus (QSFP+) transceivers.

• Virtual Chassis capability—You can connect up to 10 EX3400 switches together to form one unit that
you manage as a single chassis, called a Virtual Chassis.

• Power over Ethernet (PoE) or Power over Ethernet plus (PoE+) on all RJ-45 ports (in PoE-capable
models).

Uplink Ports

EX3400 switches have autosensing uplink ports that you can use to:

• Connect an access switch to a distribution switch

• Interconnect member switches of a Virtual Chassis

The QSFP+ uplink ports are configured as Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) by default. You can use these
ports to interconnect Virtual Chassis members. To use the QSFP+ uplink ports as network ports, you
must configure them as network ports. The uplink ports on the front panel are configured as network
4

ports by default. To use the uplink ports on the front panel as VCPs, you must configure them as VCPs.
See Setting an Uplink Port on an EX Series or QFX Series Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port.

The uplink ports on the front panel support four 1-gigabit SFP transceivers, four 10-gigabit SFP+
transceivers, or a combination of four SFP+ and SFP transceivers. The QSFP+ uplink ports support 40-
gigabit QSFP+ transceivers. For a list of supported transceivers, see "Pluggable Transceivers Supported
on EX3400 Switches" on page 59.

NOTE: You cannot form a Virtual Chassis by using SFP transceivers.

Virtual Chassis

You can interconnect a maximum of 10 EX3400 switches to form a Virtual Chassis. You can operate
these interconnected switches as a single, logical device with a single IP address.

You can use the following ports to interconnect an EX3400 switch in a Virtual Chassis:

• QSFP+ ports configured as VCPs by using QSFP+ transceivers

•
NOTE: You cannot form a Virtual Chassis by using SFP transceivers.

Uplink ports on the front panel configured as VCPs by using SFP+ transceivers

By default, the QSFP+ ports are configured as VCPs.

Console Ports

EX3400 switches have two console ports—an RJ-45 console port and a Mini-USB Type-B console port.
The RJ-45 console port is on the rear panel of the switch and the mini-USB console port is on the front
panel. Both console ports are labeled CON. The RJ-45 console port accepts a cable that has an RJ-45
connector and the Mini-USB Type-B console port accepts a Mini-B plug (5-pin) connector to connect to
the console management device.

Power over Ethernet Ports

EX3400 switches are available with or without Power over Ethernet (PoE) or Power over Ethernet Plus
(PoE+) capability. Models that support PoE or PoE+ provide that support on all RJ-45 ports. PoE ports
provide electrical current to devices—such as IP phones, wireless access points, and security cameras—
through network cables, thus eliminating the need for separate power cords for those devices.
5

NOTE: IEEE 802.3at class 4 powered devices require category 5 or higher Ethernet cables.

The remainder of this documentation uses the term PoE for both PoE and PoE+ unless there is a need to
distinguish between the two.

EX3400 Switch Models

EX3400 switch models are available:

• With 24 or 48 RJ-45 ports

• With or without PoE+ capability

• With front-to-back or back-to-front airflow

• With AC or DC power supplies

Table 1 on page 5 lists the EX3400 switch models.

Table 1: EX3400 Switch Models

Model Access Power Supply Ports in Maximum Direction of First

Ports Provided by Which PoE System Power Airflow Junos OS
Default + Is Available for Release
Available PoE/PoE+

EX3400-24T 24 Gigabit JPSU-150-AC- – – Front-to- 15.1X53-

Ethernet AFO back D50
6

Table 1: EX3400 Switch Models (Continued)

Model Access Power Supply Ports in Maximum Direction of First

Ports Provided by Which PoE System Power Airflow Junos OS
Default + Is Available for Release
Available PoE/PoE+

EX3400-24P 24 Gigabit JPSU-600-AC- All 24 • 720 W with Front-to- 15.1X53-

Ethernet AFO ports two 600 W back D50
power
supplies
installed

• 370 W with
one 600 W
power
supply
installed

EX3400-24T- 24 Gigabit JPSU-150W- – – Front-to- 15.1X53-

DC Ethernet DC-AFO back D51

EX3400-48T 48 Gigabit JPSU-150-AC- – – Front-to- 15.1X53-

Ethernet AFO back D50

EX3400-48T- 48 Gigabit JPSU-150-AC- – – Back-to- 15.1X53-

AFI Ethernet AFI front D50

EX3400-48P 48 Gigabit JPSU-920-AC- All 48 • 1440 W with Front-to- 15.1X53-

Ethernet AFO ports two 920 W back D50
power
supplies
installed

• 740 W with
one 920 W
power
supply
installed
7

Table 1: EX3400 Switch Models (Continued)

Model Access Power Supply Ports in Maximum Direction of First

Ports Provided by Which PoE System Power Airflow Junos OS
Default + Is Available for Release
Available PoE/PoE+

EX3400-48T- 48 Gigabit JPSU-150W- – – Front-to- 18.2R3-S4

DC Ethernet DC-AFO back

EX3400 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping

This topic describes the hardware terms used in EX3400 switch documentation and the corresponding
terms used in the Junos OS CLI. See Table 2 on page 7.

Table 2: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX3400 Switches

Hardware Item (Field Description (Field as Value (Field as Item in Additional

as Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Documentation Information

Chassis One of the following: – Switch chassis "Chassis Physical

Specifications for
• EX3400-24T EX3400 Switches"
on page 10
• EX3400-24P

• EX3400-24T-DC

• EX3400-48T

• EX3400-48T-AFI

• EX3400-48P

• EX3400-48T-DC
8

Table 2: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Item (Field Description (Field as Value (Field as Item in Additional

as Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Documentation Information

FPC (n) On standalone Value of n is always The switch does Understanding

EX3400 switches: 0. not have actual Interface Naming
FPCs. In this Conventions
Abbreviated name of case, FPC refers
the Flexible PIC to the switch
Concentrator (FPC) itself.

One of the following:

• EX3400-24T

• EX3400-24P

• EX3400-24T-DC

• EX3400-48T

• EX3400-48T-AFI

• EX3400-48P

• EX3400-48T-DC

On EX3400 Virtual n is a value in the In this case, the Understanding

Chassis: Member ID range of 0–9. FPC number Virtual Chassis
of the switch within refers to the Components
the Virtual Chassis member ID
assigned to the
switch.

PIC (n) Abbreviated name of n is a value in the The switch does Understanding
the Physical Interface range of 0–2. not have actual Interface Naming
Card (PIC) PIC devices; see Conventions
entries for PIC 0
through PIC 2
for the
equivalent item
on the switch.
9

Table 2: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Item (Field Description (Field as Value (Field as Item in Additional

as Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Documentation Information

One of the following: PIC 0 RJ-45 ports on "Front Panel of an

the front panel EX3400 Switch"
• 24x 10/100/1000 of the switch. on page 13
BASE-T

• 48x 10/100/1000
BASE-T

4x GE SFP+ PIC 2 SFP+ uplink "Front Panel of an

ports on the EX3400 Switch"
front panel of on page 13
the switch.

2x XE QSFP+ PIC 1 QSFP+ uplink "Rear Panel of an

ports on the EX3400 Switch"
rear panel of the on page 14
switch.

Xcvr (n) Abbreviated name of n is a value Optical "Pluggable

the transceiver equivalent to the transceivers Transceivers
number of the port Supported on
in which the EX3400 Switches"
transceiver is on page 59
installed.
10

Table 2: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Item (Field Description (Field as Value (Field as Item in Additional

as Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Displayed in CLI) Documentation Information

Power Supply (n) One of the following: n has a value 0 or 1, AC power "AC Power Supply
corresponding to the supply or DC in EX3400
• JPSU-150W-AC- power supply slot power supply Switches" on page
AFI number. 28

• JPSU-150W-AC- "DC Power Supply

AFO in EX3400
Switches" on page
• JPSU-600W-AC- 33
AFO

• JPSU-920W-AC-
AFO

• JPSU-150W-DC-
AFO

Fan Tray One of the following: n has a value 0 or 1, Fan tray "EX3400 Cooling
corresponding to the System" on page
• Fan Module, fan module slot 24
Airflow In (AFI) number.

• Fan Module,
Airflow Out (AFO)

Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3400 Switches

The EX3400 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware components. Table
3 on page 10 summarizes the physical specifications of the EX3400 switch chassis.

Table 3: Physical Specifications of the EX3400 Switch Chassis

Description Value

Chassis height 1.72 in. (4.37 cm)

Table 3: Physical Specifications of the EX3400 Switch Chassis (Continued)

Description Value

Chassis width • 17.4 in. (44.1 cm)

• 19 in. (48.2 cm) with mounting brackets attached

Chassis depth • With no power supply installed: 13.78 in. (35 cm)

• With power supply installed: 15.05 in. (38.24 cm)

Weight • EX3400-24T (without power supply or fan modules installed): 9.76 lb

(4.43 kg)

• EX3400-24T-DC (without power supply or fan modules installed): 9.76 lb

(4.43 kg)

• EX3400-24P (without power supply or fan modules installed): 9.97 lb

(4.52 kg)

• EX3400-48T (without power supply or fan modules installed): 10.23 lb

(4.64 kg)

• EX3400-48T-AFI (without power supply or fan modules installed): 10.24 lb

(4.64 kg)

• EX3400-48P (without power supply or fan modules installed): 10.49 lb

(4.76 kg)

• EX3400-48T-DC (without power supply or fan modules installed): 10.23 lb

(4.64 kg)

• JPSU-150-AC-AFO: 1.43 lb (0.65 kg)

• JPSU-150-AC-AFI: 1.43 lb (0.65 kg)

• JPSU-600-AC-AFO: 1.82 lb (0.83 kg)

• JPSU-920-AC-AFO: 1.87 lb (0.85 kg)

• JPSU-150W-DC-AFO: 1.43 lb (0.65 kg)

• Fan module: 1.59 lb (0.72 kg)

SEE ALSO

Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch | 93

Field-Replaceable Units in EX3400 Switches

Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are components that you can replace at your site. The FRUs in EX3400
switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch. The FRUs in EX3400 switches are:

• Power supplies

• Fan modules

• Transceivers

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or upgrade of
hardware components at https://www.juniper.net/customers/support/tools/updateinstallbase/.
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note does not
apply if you replace existing components with the same type of component.

EX3400 Chassis

IN THIS SECTION

Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch | 13

Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch | 14

Chassis Status LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 16

Management Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 18

RJ-45 Network Port and Uplink Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 20

Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch

The front panel of an EX3400 switch consists of the following components:

• RJ-45 ports:

• Depending on the switch model, 24 or 48 RJ-45 ports (labeled 0 through 23 or 0 through 47) that
support 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet connectors

• PoE available in all RJ-45 ports in EX3400-24P and EX3400-48P models

• PoE not available in any network port in EX3400-24T, EX3400-24T-DC, EX3400-48T,

EX3400-48T-AFI, and EX3400-48T-DC models

• Three chassis status LEDs

• Four port status mode LEDs in models with PoE capability and three port status mode LEDs in
models without PoE capability

• One Factory Reset/Mode button

• One Mini-USB console port (the Mini-USB Type-B console port accepts a Mini-B plug (5-pin)
connector to connect to the console management device)

• Four uplink ports that support SFP+ transceivers, SFP transceivers, or a combination of these
transceivers. These uplink ports are configured as network ports by default. To use the uplink ports
to interconnect Virtual Chassis members, you must configure them as VCPs. See Setting an Uplink
Port on an EX Series or QFX Series Switch as a Virtual Chassis Port.

Figure 1 on page 13 shows the front panel of an EX3400 switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports. Figure
2 on page 14 shows the front panel of an EX3400 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Figure 1: Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports

1— RJ-45 ports 4— Factory Reset/Mode button

2— Chassis status LEDs 5— Mini-USB console port

3— Port status mode LEDs. The LED labeled PoE 6— Uplink ports
is present only on models with PoE
capability.

Figure 2: Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports

1— RJ-45 ports 4— Factory Reset/Mode button

2— Chassis status LEDs 5— Mini-USB console port

3— Port status mode LEDs. The LED labeled PoE 6— Uplink ports
is present only on models with PoE
capability.

Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch

The rear panel of the EX3400 switch consists of the following components:

• 1 USB port

• 1 management Ethernet port that supports an RJ-45 connector

• 1 RJ-45 console port (the RJ-45 console port accepts a cable with an RJ-45 connector to connect to
the console management device)

• 1 protective earthing terminal

• 2 QSFP+ uplink ports. These uplink ports are configured as Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) by default.
You can use these uplink ports to interconnect Virtual Chassis members. To use the QSFP+ uplink
ports as network ports, you must configure them as network ports.

• 1 ESD point

• 2 fan modules
15

• CLEI code label

• Serial Number ID Label

• 1 AC power supply or DC power supply

• Empty slot for power supply covered by a blank panel or DC power supply

Figure 3 on page 15 shows the rear panel of an EX3400 switch with AC power supply.

The power cord retainer extends out of the chassis by 3 in. (7.62 cm). The fan module handle extends
out of the chassis by 1.2 in. (3 cm).

Figure 3: Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch with an AC Power Supply

1— USB port 7— Fan modules

2— Management Ethernet port 8— CLEI code label

3— RJ-45 console port 9— Serial Number ID Label

4— Protective earthing terminal 10— AC power supply

5— QSFP+ uplink ports 11— Empty slot for power supply covered by a
blank panel
6— ESD point

Figure 4 on page 15 shows the rear panel of an EX3400 switch with DC power supply.

Figure 4: Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch with a DC Power Supply

1— USB port 7— Fan modules

2— Management Ethernet port 8— CLEI code label

3— RJ-45 console port 9— Serial Number ID Label

4— Protective earthing terminal 10— DC power supply

5— QSFP+ uplink ports 11— Empty slot for power supply covered by a
blank panel
6— ESD point

NOTE: EX3400 switches shipped after 2 February, 2017 have serial number ID label on the side
panel of the chassis and on the rear panel of the chassis. EX3400 switches shipped before 2
February, 2017 have the serial number ID label only on the side panel of the chassis.

Chassis Status LEDs in EX3400 Switches

The front panel of an EX3400 switch has three chassis status LEDs labeled SYS, ALM, and MST (see
Figure 5 on page 16).

Figure 5: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3400 Switch

1— Chassis Status LEDs

Table 4 on page 17 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX3400 switch, their colors and states, and
the status they indicate.
17

Table 4: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3400 Switch

LED Label Color State and Description

SYS Green • On steadily—Junos OS for EX Series switches has

been loaded on the switch.

• Blinking—The switch is booting.

• Off—The switch is powered off or is halted.

ALM Red There is a major alarm.

NOTE: When you connect power to the switch, the

alarm LED (ALM) glows red. This behavior is normal.
Plugging an active Ethernet cable into the management
port (MGMT) on the switch completes the network link
and turns off the ALM LED. (See Connect a Device to a
Network for Out-of-Band Management.)
Connecting the switch to a dedicated management
console instead of a network does not affect the ALM
LED. The LED remains red until the switch is connected
to a network.

Yellow There is a minor alarm.

NOTE: The ALM LED glows yellow if you commit a

configuration to make it active on the switch without
creating a rescue configuration to back it up. To save
the most recently committed configuration as the
rescue configuration, enter the operational mode
command request system configuration rescue save.

Unlit There is no alarm or the switch is halted.

Table 4: Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3400 Switch (Continued)

LED Label Color State and Description

MST Green In a standalone EX3400 switch:

• On steadily—The switch is functioning normally as

the primary.

• Off—The switch is powered off or is halted.

In a Virtual Chassis configuration:

• On steadily—The switch is functioning normally and

is the primary in the Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Blinking—The switch is functioning normally and is

the backup in the Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Off—The switch is a linecard member in the Virtual

Chassis configuration or is halted.

A major alarm (red) indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action.

A minor alarm (yellow) indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or maintenance. A
minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or performance degradation.

All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously.

You can view the colors of the two LEDs remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode
command show chassis led.

SEE ALSO

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches | 222

Management Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches

The management port, which is on the rear panel of an EX3400 switch, has two LEDs that indicate link/
activity and port status (see Figure 6 on page 19).
19

Figure 6: LEDs on the Management Port on an EX3400 Switch

1— Link/Activity LED 2— Status LED

Table 5 on page 19 describes the Link/Activity LED.

Table 5: Link/Activity LED on the Management Port on an EX3400 Switch

LED Color State and Description

Link/Activity Green • Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there
is link activity.

• Off—The port is not active.

Table 6 on page 19 describes the Status LED.

Table 6: Status LED on the Management Port on an EX3400 Switch

LED Color State and Description

Status Green Indicates the speed. The speed indicators are:

• Off—Link speed is 10 Mbps

• Blinking—Link speed is 100 Mbps

• On Steadily—Link speed is 1000 Mbps

SEE ALSO

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 123

RJ-45 Network Port and Uplink Port LEDs in EX3400 Switches

Each RJ-45 network port and the uplink port on an EX3400 switch have two LEDs each that indicate
link/activity and port status. See Figure 7 on page 20, Figure 8 on page 20, and Figure 9 on page 20.

Figure 7: LEDs on the RJ-45 Network Ports

Figure 8: LEDs on the SFP+ Uplink Ports

1— Link/Activity LED on the SFP+ uplink ports 2— Status LED on the SFP+ uplink ports

Figure 9: LEDs on the QSFP+ Uplink Ports

1— Link/Activity LED on the QSFP+ uplink ports 2— Status LED on the QSFP+ uplink ports
21

Table 7 on page 21 describes the Link/Activity LED.

Table 7: Link/Activity LED on the RJ-45 Network Ports and the Uplink Ports

LED Color State and Description

Link/Activity Green • Blinking—The port and the link are active, and there is link
activity; or the switch is transitioning to the EZSetup mode.

• On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no link
activity; or the switch is reverting to the factory default
configuration.

• Off—The port is not active.

Figure 10 on page 21 shows the LEDs that indicate the status of one of the four port parameters—
speed, duplex mode, administrative status, and Power over Ethernet (PoE) status. Use the Factory Reset/
Mode button on the far right side of the front panel to toggle the Status LED to show the different port
parameters for RJ-45 network ports. You can tell which port parameter is indicated by the Status LED by
looking at which port status mode LED (SPD, DX, EN, and PoE) is lit. The LED labeled PoE is not
available on switch models with RJ-45 network ports that do not provide PoE.

Figure 10: Port Mode LEDs on EX3400 Switches

1— Port mode LEDs

Table 8 on page 22 describes the Status LED on the RJ-45 network ports.
22

Table 8: Status LED on the RJ-45 Network Ports in EX3400 Switches

Port Parameters State and Description

Speed (SPD) Indicates the speed. The speed indicators are:

• Unlit—10 Mbps

• Blinking—100 Mbps

• On steadily—1000 Mbps

Duplex mode (DX) Indicates the duplex mode. The status indicators are:

• Green—Port is set to full-duplex mode.

• Unlit—Port is set to half-duplex mode.

Administrative status (EN) Indicates the administrative status. The status indicators are:

• Green—Port is administratively enabled.

• Unlit—Port is administratively disabled.

Table 8: Status LED on the RJ-45 Network Ports in EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Port Parameters State and Description

PoE status (PoE) Indicates the PoE status. The status indicators for are:

• On steadily—PoE is available on the port, a device that draws power

from the port is connected to the port, and the device is drawing
power from the port.

• Blinking—PoE is available on the port, but no power is drawn from the

port because of one of the following:

• No device that draws power from the port is connected to the port.

• A device that draws power from the port is connected to the port,
but the device is not drawing any power from the port.

• Unlit—PoE is not available on the port.

NOTE: PoE Status LED is available on the following EX3400 switch

models:

• EX3400-24P

• EX3400-48P

Starting in Junos OS Release 19.4R1, you can use the request chassis beacon command on EX3400
switches to identify the switch or a port on the switch. When you execute the command, the status
LEDs on the RJ-45 network ports blink two times per second irrespective of the mode the ports are
operating in (see How to Locate a Device or Port Using the Chassis Beacon).

The uplink ports operate in full-duplex mode and PoE is not applicable on uplink ports. The Status LED
on uplink ports indicate the Speed (SPD) and Administrative status (EN). Table 9 on page 24 describes
the Status LED on the uplink ports.
24

Table 9: Status LED on the Uplink Ports in EX3400 Switches

Port Parameters State and Description

Status LED Indicates the speed and administrative status.

• The indicators for SFP+ uplink ports are:

• On steadily—10 Gbps

• Blinking—1000 Mbps

• Unlit—The port is administratively disabled or the link is down

• The indicators for QSFP+ uplink ports are:

• On steadily—40-Gigabit port is up

• Unlit—40-Gigabit port is down

You can tell which port parameter is indicated by the Status LED on RJ-45 network ports and uplink
ports by issuing the operational mode command show chassis led.

EX3400 Cooling System

IN THIS SECTION

Airflow Direction in EX3400 Switch Models | 25

Front-to-Back Airflow | 25

Back-to-Front Airflow | 26

The cooling system in an EX3400 switch consists of two fans along the rear of the chassis and a fan
each in the power supplies. The fans provide front-to-back or back-to-front chassis cooling depending
on the switch model.
25

Airflow Direction in EX3400 Switch Models

Table 10 on page 25 shows the different EX3400 switch models and their direction of airflow.

Table 10: Airflow Direction in EX3400 Switch Models

Model Direction of Airflow

EX3400-24T Front-to-back

EX3400-24P Front-to-back

EX3400-24T-DC Front-to-back

EX3400-48T Front-to-back

EX3400-48T-AFI Back-to-front

EX3400-48P Front-to-back

EX3400-48T-DC Front-to-back

Front-to-Back Airflow

In switch models with front-to-back airflow, the air intake is located on the front of the chassis. Cool air
is pulled into the chassis and pushed toward the rear of the chassis. Hot air exhausts from the rear of the
chassis. See Figure 11 on page 26.
26

Figure 11: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the EX3400 Switch Chassis

Back-to-Front Airflow

In switch models with back-to-front airflow, the air intake is located on the rear of the chassis. Cool air is
pulled into the chassis and pushed toward the front of the chassis. Hot air exhausts from the front of the
chassis. See Figure 12 on page 27.
27

Figure 12: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the EX3400 Switch Chassis

Under normal operating conditions, the fans operate at moderate speeds for minimal noise. Temperature
sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis. If any fan fails or if the temperature
inside the chassis rises above the threshold, the switch raises an alarm and all functioning fans operate
at a higher speed than normal. If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold, the switch
shuts down automatically.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage
28

EX3400 Power System

IN THIS SECTION

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 28

AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 29

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 31

DC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 33

DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 35

Power Specifications for EX3400 Switches | 37

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches

The AC power supplies in EX3400 switches are hot-insertable and hot-removable field-replaceable units
(FRUs): You can install them without powering off the switch or disrupting the switching function. The
switch is shipped with one power supply installed.

NOTE: After powering on the switch, wait for at least 60 seconds before powering it off. After
powering off the switch, wait for at least 60 seconds before powering it back on.
If only one power supply is installed in your EX3400 switch, you need to power off the switch
before removing the power supply.

Table 11 on page 28 lists the power consumed by each EX3400 switch model. The maximum power
available on a PoE+ port is 30 W.

Table 11: Power Consumed by EX3400 Switches

Model Number Number of PoE-Enabled Maximum Power Maximum System Power

Ports Consumed by the Switch Available for PoE

EX3400-24T – 100 W –
29

Table 11: Power Consumed by EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Model Number Number of PoE-Enabled Maximum Power Maximum System Power

Ports Consumed by the Switch Available for PoE

EX3400-24P 24 110 W • 720 W with two

600 W power supplies
installed

• 370 W with one

600 W power supply
installed

EX3400-48T – 120 W –

EX3400-48T-AFI – 120 W –

EX3400-48P 48 120 W • 1440 W with two

920 W power supplies
installed

• 740 W with one

920 W power supply
installed

NOTE: In EU countries, Egypt, Nigeria, Saudi Arabia, Serbia, South Korea, and South Africa, you
must ensure that the redundant power supply is installed in the switch chassis.

SEE ALSO

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119

AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches

Figure 13 on page 30 shows the location of the LEDs on an AC power supply for an EX3400 switch.
30

Figure 13: AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX3400 Switch

1— DC OK LED 2— AC OK LED

Table 12 on page 30 describes the AC power supply LEDs.

Table 12: AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches

LED Color Description

AC OK Unlit Indicates one of the following:

• AC power input voltage is not within normal operating

range.

• No AC power input.

Green Power supply is receiving proper input power.

DC OK Unlit Indicates one of the following:

• IN OK LED is unlit.

• The power supply is not delivering power correctly.

Green The power supply is delivering power and is functioning

correctly.

Red The power supply has failed and must be replaced.

NOTE: If the AC OK LED and the DC OK LED are not lit green, either the AC power cord is not
installed properly or the power input voltage is not within normal operating range.
If the AC OK LED is lit green and the DC OK LED is unlit or lit red, the AC power supply is
installed properly, but the power supply has an internal failure.

AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3400 Switches

A detachable AC power cord is supplied with the AC power supplies. The coupler is type C13 as
described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug end of the
power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for your geographical location.

CAUTION: The AC power cord provided with each power supply is intended for use
with that power supply only and not for any other use.

NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters (approximately 14.75 feet)
in length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and
210-52 and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). The cords supplied with the switch
are in compliance.

Table 13 on page 31 gives the AC power cord specifications for the countries and regions listed in the
table.

Table 13: AC Power Cord Specifications

Country/Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards Juniper Model Number

Argentina 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz IRAM 2073 Type RA/3 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-AR

Australia 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz AS/NZZS 3112 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-AU

SAA/3

Brazil 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz NBR 14136 Type BR/3 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-BR

Table 13: AC Power Cord Specifications (Continued)

Country/Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards Juniper Model Number

China 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz GB 1002-1996 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-CH

PRC/3

Europe (except Italy, 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEE (7) VII Type VIIG CBL-EX-PWR-C13-EU
Switzerland, and United
Kingdom)

India 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz IS 1293 Type IND/3 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IN

Israel 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SI 32/1971 Type IL/3G CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IL

Italy 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEI 23-16 Type I/3G CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IT

Japan 125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz or SS-00259 Type VCTF CBL-EX-PWR-C13-JP

60 Hz

Korea 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz or CEE (7) VII Type VIIGK CBL-EX-PWR-C13-KR

60 Hz

North America 125 VAC, 13 A, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15 Type N5-15 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-US

125 VAC, 15 A, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15 Type N5-15 CBL-PWR-C13-US-48P

South Africa 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SABS 164/1:1992 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-SA

ZA/13

Switzerland 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SEV 6534-2 Type 12G CBL-EX-PWR-C13-SZ

Taiwan 125 VAC, 11 A and 15 A, NEMA 5-15P Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-TW

50 Hz N5-15P

United Kingdom 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz BS 1363/A Type BS89/13 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-UK

Figure 14 on page 33 illustrates the plug on the power cord for some of the countries or regions listed
in Table 13 on page 31.

Figure 14: AC Plug Types

DC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Characteristics of a DC Power Supply | 34

DC Power Supply Airflow | 35

The DC power supplies in EX3400 switches are hot-insertable and hot-removable field-replaceable units
(FRUs): You can install them without powering off the switch or disrupting the switching function. The
switch is shipped with one power supply installed.

Table 14 on page 34 lists the power consumed by a DC-powered EX3400 switch model.
34

Table 14: Power Consumed by a DC-Powered EX3400 Switch

Model Number Number of PoE-Enabled Maximum Power Maximum System Power

Ports Consumed by the Switch Available for PoE

EX3400-24T-DC – 110 W –

EX3400-48T-DC – 120 W –

Characteristics of a DC Power Supply

EX3400 switches support 150 W DC power supply.

You can install up to two DC power supplies in an EX3400 switch. Power supplies are installed in the
power supply slots labeled PSU 0 and PSU 1 in the rear panel of the chassis.

Table 15 on page 34 lists the details of the power supplies used in EX3400 switches.

Table 15: Details of the DC Power Supplies in EX3400 Switches

Details 150 W DC Power Supply

Model number JPSU-150-DC-AFO

Field-replaceable unit (FRU) type Hot-insertable and hot-removable

Power supply weight 1.433 lb (0.65 kg)

Minimum installed in chassis 1

Maximum installed in chassis 2

Power supply slots Install in power supply slots in the rear panel of the chassis.

Fans Internal
35

Table 15: Details of the DC Power Supplies in EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Details 150 W DC Power Supply

Airflow Front-to-back, indicated by label AIR OUT

Power supply status LEDs IN OK and OUT OK

To prevent electrical injury while installing or removing DC power supplies, carefully follow the
instructions given in "Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch" on page 210 and "Removing a
DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch" on page 208.

DC Power Supply Airflow

Each power supply has its own fan and is cooled by its own internal cooling system.

Each power supply has a label AIR OUT on the faceplate of the power supply that indicates the
direction of airflow in the power supply.

Table 16 on page 35 lists the DC power supply models and the direction of airflow in them.

Table 16: Airflow Direction in DC Power Supply Models for EX3400 Switches

Model Label on Power Direction of Airflow

Supply

JPSU-150-DC- AIR OUT Front-to-back—that is, air intake to cool the chassis is through the
AFO vents on the front panel of the chassis and hot air exhausts through
the vents on the rear panel of the chassis.

DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3400 Switches

Figure 15 on page 36 shows the LEDs on a DC power supply for an EX3400 switch.
36

Figure 15: LEDs on the DC Power Supply for EX3400 Switches

1— OUT OK LED 2— IN OK LED

Table 17 on page 36 describes the LEDs on the DC power supplies.

Table 17: DC Power Supply LEDs on an EX3400 Switch

Name Color Description

IN OK Unlit Indicates one of the following:

• The power supply is disconnected from the DC power feed.

• The DC power input voltage is not within the normal operating range.

• No DC power input.

Green The power supply is receiving power.

OUT OK Unlit Indicates one of the following:

• IN OK LED is unlit.

• The power supply is not delivering power correctly.

Green The power supply is functioning correctly.

Red The power supply has failed and must be replaced.

Power Specifications for EX3400 Switches

This topic describes the power supply electrical specifications for EX3400 switches.

Table 18 on page 37 provides the AC power supply electrical specifications for EX3400 switches.

Table 18: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3400 Switches

Item Specification

AC input voltage 100 through 240 VAC

AC input line frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz nominal

AC system current rating • EX3400-24P: 8.5 A at 100 VAC

• EX3400-24P: 4.25 A at 240 VAC

• EX3400-24T: 3 A at 100 VAC

• EX3400-24T: 1.5 A at 240 VAC

• EX3400-48P: 12 A at 100 VAC

• EX3400-48P: 6.5 A at 240 VAC

• EX3400-48T: 3 A at 100 VAC

• EX3400-48T: 1.5 A at 240 VAC

Table 19 on page 37 provides the DC power supply electrical specifications for EX3400 switches.

Table 19: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3400 Switches

Item Specification

DC input voltage –48 through –60 VDC

DC input current rating 4.7 A maximum at –48 VDC

Power supply output 150 W

NOTE: For DC power supplies, we recommend that you provide at least 4.7 A at 48 VDC and use
a facility circuit breaker rated for 10 A minimum. Doing so enables you to operate the switch in
any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure, and enables the switch to
function at full capacity using multiple power supplies.
2 CHAPTER

Site Planning, Preparation, and

Specifications

Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400 Switches | 40

EX3400 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 44

EX3400 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 59

EX3400 Management Cable Specifications and Pinouts | 69

EX3400 Virtual Chassis | 85

Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400 Switches

The checklist in Table 20 on page 40 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site
for EX3400 switch installation.

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Environment

Verify that "Environmental Requirements and Specifications

environmental for EX Series Switches" on page 44
factors such as
temperature
and humidity
do not exceed
switch
tolerances.

Power

Measure
distance
between
external power
sources and
switch
installation site.

Locate sites for

connection of
system
grounding.

Calculate the "Power Specifications for EX3400 Switches" on

power page 37
consumption
and
requirements.
41

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist (Continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Hardware Configuration

Choose the "EX3400 Switches Hardware Overview" on page 2

number and
types of
switches you
want to install.

Rack or Cabinet

Verify that • "Rack Requirements" on page 52

your rack or
cabinet meets • "Cabinet Requirements" on page 54
the minimum
requirements
for the
installation of
the switch.

Plan rack or "Clearance Requirements for Airflow and

cabinet Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches" on
location, page 55
including
required space
clearances.

Secure the rack

or cabinet to
the floor and
building
structure.

Wall
42

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist (Continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Verify that the Requirements for Mounting an EX3400 Switch on

wall meets the a Desktop or Wall
minimum
requirements
for the
installation of
the switch.

Verify that "Clearance Requirements for Airflow and

there is Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches" on
appropriate page 55
clearance in
your selected
location.

Cables
43

Table 20: Site Preparation Checklist (Continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Acquire cables
and
connectors:

• Determine
the number
of cables
needed
based on
your
planned
configurati
on.

• Review the
maximum
distance
allowed for
each cable.
Choose the
length of
cable based
on the
distance
between
the
hardware
component
s being
connected.

Plan the cable

routing and
management.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch | 93

EX3400 Site Guidelines and Requirements

IN THIS SECTION

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches | 44

General Site Guidelines | 51

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines | 51

Rack Requirements | 52

Cabinet Requirements | 54

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches

The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated, and
temperature-controlled environment.

Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed:

• The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and filters, reducing
the efficiency of the switch cooling system.

• Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or restricted, or if the
intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the switch temperature monitor shutting
down the switch to protect the hardware components.

Table 21 on page 45 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch operation.
45

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX2200- No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

C degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
5,000 feet (1524 humidity range 10% 32° F (0° C) through 104° earthquake
meters) through 85% F (40° C) at altitudes up to requirements as
(noncondensing) 5,000 ft (1,524 m). per GR-63, Issue
4.
For information about
extended temperature SFP
transceivers supported on
EX2200 switches, see
Pluggable Transceivers
Supported on EX2200
Switches.

EX2200 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

(except degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
EX2200- 10,000 feet humidity range 10% 32° F (0° C) through 113° earthquake
C (3048 meters) through 85% F (45° C) requirements as
switches) (noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.

EX2300- No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

C degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
5,000 feet humidity range 10% 32° F (0° C) through 104° earthquake
(1524 meters) through 85% F (40° C) requirements as
(noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.

EX2300 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

(except degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
EX2300- 13,000 feet humidity range 10% 32° F (0° C) through 113° earthquake
C (3962 meters) at through 85% F (45° C) requirements as
switches) 104° F (40° C) as (noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
per GR-63 4.
46

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX3200 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
10,000 feet humidity range 10% 32° F (0° C) through 113° earthquake
(3048 meters) through 85% F (45° C) requirements as
(noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.

EX3300 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

EX3400 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

EX4200 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX4300 EX4300 switches EX4300 switches except Normal operation ensured Complies with
except the the EX4300-48MP model in the temperature range Zone 4
EX4300-48MP — Normal operation 32° F (0° C) through 113° earthquake
model— No ensured in the relative F (45° C) requirements as
performance humidity range 10% per GR-63, Issue
degradation up to through 85% 4.
10,000 feet (noncondensing)
(3048 meters)
EX4300-48MP model—
EX4300-48MP Normal operation
model— No ensured in the relative
performance humidity range 5%
degradation up to through 90%
6,000 feet (noncondensing)
(1829 meters)

EX4500 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

EX4550 No performance Normal operation • EX4550-32F switches— Complies with

degradation up to ensured in the relative Normal operation Zone 4
10,000 feet humidity range 10% ensured in the earthquake
(3048 meters) through 85% temperature range 32° requirements as
(noncondensing) F (0° C) through 113° per GR-63, Issue
F (45° C) 4.

• EX4550-32T switches—
Normal operation is
ensured in the
temperature range 32°
F through 104° F
(40° C)
48

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX4600 No performance Normal operation • Normal operation Complies with

degradation to ensured in the relative ensured in the Zone 4
6,562 feet humidity range 5% temperature range 32° earthquake
(2000 meters) through 90%, F (0° C) through 113° requirements per
noncondensing F (45° C) NEBS GR-63-
CORE, Issue 4.
• Short-term operation • Nonoperating storage
ensured in the relative temperature in shipping
humidity range 5% container: – 40° F (–
through 93%, 40° C) through 158° F
noncondensing (70° C)

NOTE: As defined in
NEBS GR-63-CORE,
Issue 4, short-term
events can be up to
96 hours in duration
but not more than 15
days per year.

EX4650 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

degradation to ensured in the relative ensured in the temperature Zone 4
6,000 feet humidity range 10% range 32° F (0° C) through earthquake
(1829 meters) through 85% 104° F (40° C) requirements as
(condensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.

EX6210 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

degradation up to ensured in the relative ensured in the temperature Zone 4
10,000 feet humidity range 10% range 32° F (0° C) through earthquake
(3048 meters) through 85% 104° F (40° C) requirements as
(noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.
49

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX8208 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

EX8216 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

EX9204 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

degradation up to ensured in the relative ensured in the temperature Zone 4
10,000 feet humidity range 5% range 32° F (0° C) through earthquake
(3048 meters) through 90% 104° F (40° C) requirements as
(noncondensing) per GR-63.
Nonoperating storage
temperature in shipping
container: – 40° F (–
40° C) to 158° F (70° C)

EX9208 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

Table 21: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch or Environment Tolerance

device

Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

EX9214 No performance Normal operation Normal operation is Complies with

EX9251 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

degradation up to ensured in relative in temperature range of 32° Telcordia
10,000 ft (3048 m) humidity range of 5% to F (0° C) to 104° F (40° C) Technologies
90%, noncondensing Zone 4
Nonoperating storage earthquake
temperature in shipping requirements
container: – 40° F (–
40° C) to 158° F (70° C)

XRE200 No performance Normal operation Normal operation ensured Complies with

degradation up to ensured in the relative in the temperature range Zone 4
10,000 feet humidity range 10% 41° F (5° C) through 104° earthquake
(3048 meters) through 85% F (40° C) requirements as
(noncondensing) per GR-63, Issue
4.

NOTE: Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment rooms
and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110– 16, 110– 17, and 110– 18 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
51

General Site Guidelines

Efficient device operation requires proper site planning and maintenance. It also requires proper layout
of the equipment, rack or cabinet, and wiring closet.

To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your device and prevent environmentally
caused equipment failures:

• Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as metal flakes.

• Follow the prescribed airflow guidelines to ensure that the cooling system functions properly. Ensure
that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the device.

• Follow the prescribed electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedures to prevent damaging the
equipment. Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time.

• Install the device in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the device.

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

Table 22 on page 52 describes the factors you must consider while planning the electrical wiring at
your site.

WARNING: You must provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and use
electrical surge-suppression devices.
Avertissement Vous devez établir un environnement protégé et convenablement mis à
la terre et utiliser des dispositifs de parasurtension.
52

Table 22: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

Site Wiring Guidelines

Factor

Signaling If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult experts in electrical surge
limitations suppression and shielding:

• Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference (RFI).

• Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed recommended distances or pass
between buildings.

• Electromagnetic pulses (EMPs) caused by lightning damage unshielded conductors and

electronic devices.

Radio To reduce or eliminate RFI from your site wiring, do the following:
frequency
interference • Use a twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors.

• If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality twisted-pair cable with
one ground conductor for each data signal, when applicable.

Electromagnet If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), particularly
ic from lightning or radio transmitters, seek expert advice.
compatibility
Strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) can cause:

• Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the device

• Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted over the lines into the equipment.

Rack Requirements

You can mount the device on two-post racks or four-post racks.

Rack requirements consist of:

• Rack type.

• Mounting bracket hole spacing.

• Rack size and strength.

• Rack connection to the building structure.

Table 23 on page 53 provides the rack requirements and specifications.

Table 23: Rack Requirements and Specifications

Rack Requirement Guidelines

Rack type A U is the standard rack unit defined by the Electronic Components Industry Association
(http://www.ecianow.org).

You can mount the device on a rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at
1U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm) increments and meets the size and strength requirements to
support the weight.

Mounting bracket The holes in the mounting brackets are spaced at 1U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm) so that the
hole spacing device can be mounted in any rack that provides holes spaced at that distance.

Rack size and Ensure that the:

strength
• Rack complies with the size and strength standards of a 19-in. rack as defined by the
Electronic Components Industry Association (http://www.ecianow.org).

• Rack rails are spaced widely enough to accommodate the external dimensions of the
device chassis. Ensure also that the outer edges of the front mounting brackets extend
the width of the chassis to 19 in. (48.2 cm).

• Rack is strong enough to support the weight of the device.

• Spacing of rails and adjacent racks provides for proper clearance around the device and
rack.

Rack connection to Secure the rack as follows:

building structure
• Secure the rack to the building structure.

• If your geographical area is earthquake-prone, secure the rack to the floor.

• Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum
stability.
54

SEE ALSO

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings

Cabinet Requirements

You can mount the device in a cabinet that contains a 19-in. rack.

Cabinet requirements consist of:

• Cabinet size.

• Clearance requirements.

• Cabinet airflow requirements.

Table 24 on page 54 provides the cabinet requirements and specifications.

Table 24: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications

Cabinet Requirement Guidelines

Cabinet size • The minimum cabinet size is 36 in. (91.4 cm) deep. Large cabinets
improve airflow and reduce chances of overheating.

Cabinet clearance • The outer edges of the front mounting brackets extend the width of the
chassis to 19 in. (48.2 cm).

• The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 30.7 in. (78 cm)
between the inside of the front door and the inside of the rear door.
55

Table 24: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications (Continued)

Cabinet Requirement Guidelines

Cabinet airflow requirements When you mount the device in a cabinet, ensure that ventilation through
the cabinet is sufficient to prevent overheating, as follows:

• Ensure adequate cool air supply to dissipate the thermal output of the
device or devices.

• Ensure that the hot air exhaust of the chassis exits the cabinet without
recirculating into the device. An open cabinet (without a top or doors)
that employs hot air exhaust extraction from the top ensures the best
airflow through the chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors,
perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot air exhaust.

• Install the device in the cabinet in a way that maximizes the open space
on the side of the chassis that has the hot air exhaust.

• Route and secure all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and
from the chassis.

• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent cabinets is such that proper
clearance exists around the device and cabinet.

• A cabinet larger than the minimum required provides better airflow and
reduces the chance of overheating.

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for

EX3400 Switches

When planning the site for installing an EX3400 switch, you must allow sufficient clearance around the
installed switch (see Figure 16 on page 56).
56

Figure 16: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches

The power cord retainer extends out of the rear of the chassis by 3 in. (7.62 cm). The fan module handle
extends out of the chassis by 1.2 in. (3 cm).

Follow these clearance requirements:

• For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted. See
Figure 17 on page 57 and Figure 18 on page 58.
57

Figure 17: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the EX3400 Switch Chassis

Figure 18: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the EX3400 Switch Chassis

• If you are mounting an EX3400 switch in a rack or cabinet with other equipment, or if you are placing
it on the desktop or floor near other equipment, ensure that the exhaust from other equipment does
not blow into the intake vents of the chassis.

• Leave at least 24 in. (61 cm) in front of the switch and behind the switch. For service personnel to
remove and install hardware components, you must leave adequate space at the front and back of
the switch. NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at least 30 in. (76.2 cm) in front of the rack or
cabinet and 24 in. (61 cm) behind the rack or cabinet.
59

EX3400 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning

IN THIS SECTION

Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX3400 Switches | 59

SFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches | 60

QSFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches | 63

Overview of EX Series Switches: Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion | 64

Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for EX Series Devices | 66

Calculating the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for EX Series Devices | 67

Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX3400 Switches

Uplink ports on EX3400 switches support SFP, SFP+, and QSFP+ transceivers. You can find the list of
transceivers supported on EX3400 switches and information about those transceivers at the Hardware
Compatibility Tool page for EX3400.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides

complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
60

the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

The Gigabit Ethernet SFP, SFP+, and QSFP+ transceivers installed in EX3400 switches support digital
optical monitoring (DOM): You can view the diagnostic details for these transceivers by issuing the
operational mode CLI command show interfaces diagnostics optics.

NOTE: The transceivers support DOM even if they are installed in uplink ports configured as
Virtual Chassis ports.

SEE ALSO

Front Panel of an EX3400 Switch | 13

Install a Transceiver | 212
Remove a Transceiver | 215

SFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Cable Specifications | 61

List of DAC Cables Supported on EX Series Switches | 62

Standards Supported by These Cables | 62

Small form-factor pluggable plus transceiver (SFP+) direct attach copper (DAC) cables, also known as
Twinax cables, are suitable for in-rack connections between servers and switches. They are suitable for
short distances, making them ideal for highly cost-effective networking connectivity within a rack and
between adjacent racks.
61

NOTE: We recommend that you use only SFP+ DAC cables purchased from Juniper Networks
with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides

Cable Specifications

EX Series switches support SFP+ passive DAC cables. The passive Twinax cable is a straight cable with
no active electronic components. EX Series switches support 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, and 7 m long SFP+ passive
DAC cables. See Figure 19 on page 61.

Figure 19: SFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches

The cables are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them without powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. A cable comprises a low-voltage cable assembly that
connects directly into two 10-Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) ports, one at each end of the cable. The cables use
high-performance integrated duplex serial data links for bidirectional communication and are designed
for data rates of up to 10 Gbps.
62

List of DAC Cables Supported on EX Series Switches

For the list of DAC cables supported on EX Series switches and the specifications of these cables, see
the following references:

• EX2300—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX2300

• EX3200—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX3200

• EX3300—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX3300

• EX3400—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX3400

• EX4100 —Hardware Compatibility Tool for EX4100

• EX4100-F —Hardware Compatibility Tool for EX4100-F

• EX4100-H

• EX4200—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4200

• EX4300—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4300

• EX4400—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4400

• EX4500—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4500

• EX4550—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4550

• EX4600—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4600

• EX8208—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX8208

• EX8216—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX8216

• EX9251—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX9251

• EX9253—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX9253

Standards Supported by These Cables

The cables comply with the following standards:

• SFP mechanical standard SFF-843— see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8431.PDF.

• Electrical interface standard SFF-8432— see ftp://ftp.seagate.com/sff/SFF-8432.PDF.

• SFP+ Multi-Source Alliance (MSA) standards

QSFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables for EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Cable Specifications | 63

DAC Cables Supported on EX3400, EX4300, EX4550, EX4600, EX9251, and EX9253 Switches | 64

Quad small form-factor pluggable plus (QSFP+) direct attach copper (DAC) cables are suitable for in-rack
connections between QSFP+ ports on EX3400, EX4300, EX4550, EX4600, EX9251, and EX9253
switches. They are suitable for short distances, making them ideal for highly cost-effective networking
connectivity within a rack and between adjacent racks.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only QSFP+ DAC cables purchased from Juniper Networks
with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides

Cable Specifications

QSFP+ passive DAC cables are hot-removable and hot-insertable. A cable consists of a cable assembly
that connects directly into two QSFP+ modules, one at each end of the cable. The cables use integrated
duplex serial data links for bidirectional communication and are designed for data rates up to 40 Gbps.
64

Passive DAC cables have no signal amplification built into the cable assembly. See Figure 20 on page
64.

Figure 20: QSFP+ Direct Attach Copper Cables

DAC Cables Supported on EX3400, EX4300, EX4550, EX4600, EX9251, and EX9253
Switches

For the list of DAC cables supported on EX3400, EX4300, EX4550, EX4600, EX9251, and EX9253
switches and the specifications of these cables, see:

• EX3400—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX3400

• EX4300—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4300

• EX4550—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4550

• EX4600—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX4600

• EX9251—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX9251

• EX9253—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for EX9253

Overview of EX Series Switches: Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss,

Attenuation, and Dispersion

IN THIS SECTION

Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable | 65

Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable | 65

To determine the power budget and power margin needed for fiber-optic connections, you need to
understand how signal loss, attenuation, and dispersion affect transmission. EX Series switches use
various types of network cables, including multimode and single-mode fiber-optic cable.

Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable

Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally (bounce off the
walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs as light sources. However, LEDs
are not coherent light sources. They spray varying wavelengths of light into the multimode fiber, which
reflects the light at different angles. Light rays travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber, causing
signal dispersion. When light traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber), higher-order mode loss
(HOL) occurs. (Cladding consists of layers of lower-refractive index material in close contact with a core
material of higher refractive index.) Together, these factors reduce the transmission distance of
multimode fiber compared to that of single-mode fiber.

Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light reflect internally through one layer only.
Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers generate a single wavelength of
light, which travels in a straight line through the single-mode fiber. Compared to multimode fiber, single-
mode fiber has a higher bandwidth and can carry signals for longer distances. Single-mode fiber is
consequently more expensive than multimode fiber.

Exceeding the maximum transmission distances can result in significant signal loss, which causes
unreliable transmission.

Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable

An optical data link functions correctly provided that modulated light reaching the receiver has enough
power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the reduction in strength of the light signal during
transmission. Passive media components such as cables, cable splices, and connectors cause
attenuation. Although attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media, it still
occurs in both multimode and single-mode transmissions. An efficient optical data link must transmit
enough light to overcome attenuation.

Dispersion is the spreading of the signal over time. The following two types of dispersion can affect
signal transmission through an optical data link:

• Chromatic dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the different speeds
of light rays

• Modal dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the different propagation
modes in the fiber

For multimode transmission, modal dispersion usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length.
Chromatic dispersion or attenuation is not a factor.
66

For single-mode transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However, at higher bit rates and over
longer distances, chromatic dispersion limits the maximum link length.

An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that the receiver
requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion must be within the limits
specified for the type of link in Telcordia Technologies document GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and
International Telecommunications Union (ITU) document G.957.

When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, you can consider its effect as a power penalty in
the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum of component attenuation, power
penalties (including those from dispersion), and a safety margin for unexpected power loss.

Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for EX Series Devices

To ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation, calculate the link's
power budget when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances. This planning helps you ensure that
fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation. The power budget is the maximum
amount of power the link can transmit. When you calculate the power budget, you use a worst-case
analysis to provide a margin of error. You use a worst-case analysis even though not all the parts of an
actual system operate at the worst-case levels.

To calculate the worst-case estimate for a fiber-optic cable power budget (PB) for the link:

1. Determine values for the link's minimum transmitter power (PT) and minimum receiver sensitivity
(PR). In the following example, we measure both (PT) and (PR ) in decibels relative to one milliwatt
(dBm).
PT = – 15 dBm

PR = – 28 dBm

NOTE: See the specifications for your transmitter and receiver to find the minimum
transmitter power and minimum receiver sensitivity.

2. Calculate the power budget (PB) by subtracting (PR) from (PT):

– 15 dBm – (–28 dBm) = 13 dBm
67

Calculating the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for EX Series Devices

Before calculating the power margin, calculate the power budget (see Calculating the Fiber-Optic Cable
Power Budget for EX Series Devices).

Calculate the link's power margin when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances to ensure that
fiber-optic connections have sufficient signal power to overcome system loss and still satisfy the
minimum input requirements of the receiver for the required performance level. The power margin (PM)
is the amount of power available after you subtract attenuation or link loss (LL) from the power budget
(PB).

When you calculate the power margin, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even
though not all parts of an actual system operate at worst-case levels. A power margin (PM ) greater than
zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to operate the receiver and that it does not exceed the
maximum receiver input power. This means that the link will work. A (PM) that is zero or negative
indicates insufficient power to operate the receiver. See the specification for your receiver to find the
maximum receiver input power.

To calculate the worst-case estimate for the power margin (PM) for the link:

1. Determine the maximum value for link loss (LL) by adding estimated values for applicable link-loss
factors—for example, use the sample values for various factors as provided in Table 25 on page 67
(here, the link is 2 km long and multimode, and the (PB) is 13 dBm):
Table 25: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss

Link-Loss Factor Estimated Link-Loss Value Sample (LL) Calculation Values

Higher-order mode losses • Multimode—0.5 dBm • 0.5 dBm

(HOL)
• Single mode—None • 0 dBm

Modal and chromatic • Multimode—None, if product of • 0 dBm

dispersion bandwidth and distance is less
than 500 MHz/km • 0 dBm

• Single mode—None

Connector 0.5 dBm This example assumes 5 connectors.

Loss for 5 connectors:

(5) * (0.5 dBm) = 2.5 dBm

Table 25: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss (Continued)

Link-Loss Factor Estimated Link-Loss Value Sample (LL) Calculation Values

Splice 0.5 dBm This example assumes 2 splices. Loss

for two splices:

(2) * (0.5 dBm) = 1 dBm

Fiber attenuation • Multimode—1 dBm/km This example assumes the link is 2

km long. Fiber attenuation for 2 km:
• Single mode—0.5 dBm/km
• (2 km) * (1.0 dBm/km) = 2 dBm

• (2 km) * (0.5 dBm/km) = 1 dBm

Clock Recovery Module (CRM) 1 dBm 1 dBm

NOTE: For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment and other
factors, see your vendor documentation for that equipment.

2. Calculate the (PM) by subtracting (LL) from (PB):

PB – LL = PM

(13 dBm) – (0.5 dBm [HOL]) – ((5) * (0.5 dBm)) – ((2) * (0.5 dBm)) – ((2 km) * (1.0 dBm/km)) – (1 dB
[CRM]) = PM

13 dBm – 0.5 dBm – 2.5 dBm – 1 dBm – 2 dBm – 1 dBm = PM

PM = 6 dBm

The calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the link has sufficient power for
transmission. Also, the power margin value does not exceed the maximum receiver input power.
Refer to the specification for your receiver to find the maximum receiver input power.
69

EX3400 Management Cable Specifications and

Pinouts

IN THIS SECTION

Management Cable Specifications | 69

Console Port Connector Pinout Information | 70

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information | 71

USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch | 72

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port Connector Pinout Information | 73

SFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch | 79

QSFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch | 81

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information | 84

Management Cable Specifications

Table 26 on page 69 lists the specifications for the cables that connect the console and management
ports to management devices.

Table 26: Specifications of Cables to Connect to Management Devices

Ports Cable Specifications Receptacle Additional Information

RJ-45 Console port Rollover cable RJ-45 Connect a Device to a

Management Console
Using an RJ-45 Connector

Management Ethernet Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 Connect a Device to a

port RJ-45 connector Network for Out-of-Band
Management
70

Table 26: Specifications of Cables to Connect to Management Devices (Continued)

Ports Cable Specifications Receptacle Additional Information

Mini-USB Type-B Console Mini-USB cable with Mini-USB

port standard-A and Mini-USB
Type-B (5-pin) connector

Console Port Connector Pinout Information

The console port on a Juniper Networks device is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a console management device. The default baud rate for the console port is
9600 baud.

Table 27 on page 71 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 console connector.

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or if
you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

If you want to use RJ-45 to USB-A or RJ-45 to USB-C adapter you must have X64 (64-Bit)
Virtual COM port (VCP) driver installed on your PC. See, https://ftdichip.com/drivers/vcp-
drivers/ to download the driver.

NOTE: If your laptop or desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or desktop PC directly to a device, use a combination of the RJ-45-to-DB-9
socket adapter and a USB-to-DB-9 plug adapter. You must provide the USB-to-DB-9 plug
adapter.
71

Table 27: Console Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 NC No connect

2 NC No connect

3 TxD Output Transmit data

4 GND Signal ground

5 GND Signal ground

6 RxD Input Receive data

7 DCD Input Data carrier detect

8 NC No connect

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information

Table 28 on page 71 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 connector for the management port
on Juniper Networks devices.

Table 28: RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 TRP1+ Transmit/receive data pair 1

2 TRP1- Transmit/receive data pair 1

Table 28: RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

3 TRP2+ Transmit/receive data pair 2

4 TRP3+ Transmit/receive data pair 3

5 TRP3- Transmit/receive data pair 3

6 TRP2- Transmit/receive data pair 2

7 TRP4+ Transmit/receive data pair 4

8 TRP4- Transmit/receive data pair 4

USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch

Juniper Networks tested and officially supports the following USB flash drives for the USB port on all
EX Series switches:

• RE-USB-1G-S

• RE-USB-2G-S

• RE-USB-4G-S

CAUTION: Any USB memory product not listed as supported for EX Series switches
has not been tested by Juniper Networks. The use of any unsupported USB memory
product could expose your EX Series switch to unpredictable behavior. Juniper
Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) can provide only limited support for
issues related to unsupported hardware. We strongly recommend that you use only
supported USB flash drives.

All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features:

• USB 2.0 or later.

• Formatted with a FAT or MS-DOS file system.

• If the switch is running Junos OS Release 9.5 or earlier, the formatting method must use a primary
boot record. Microsoft Windows formatting, by default, does not use a primary boot record. See the
documentation for your USB flash drive for information about how your USB flash drive is formatted.

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port
Connector Pinout Information

The tables in this topic describe the connector pinout information for the RJ-45, QSFP+, QSFP28, SFP+,
and SFP ports.

• Table 29 on page 73—10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet network port connector pinout information

• Table 30 on page 74—SFP network port connector pinout information

• Table 31 on page 75—SFP+ network port connector pinout information

• Table 32 on page 77—QSFP+ and QSFP28 network module ports connector pinout information

Table 29: 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 TRP1+ Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoE models)

2 TRP1- Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoE models)

3 TRP2+ Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoE models)

4 TRP3+ Transmit/receive data pair 3

5 TRP3- Transmit/receive data pair 3

Table 29: 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

6 TRP2- Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoE models)

7 TRP4+ Transmit/receive data pair 4

8 TRP4- Transmit/receive data pair 4

Table 30: SFP Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 VeeT Module transmitter ground

2 TX_Fault Module transmitter fault

3 TX_Disable Transmitter disabled

4 SDA 2-wire serial interface data line

5 SCL- 2-wire serial interface clock

6 MOD_ABS Module absent

7 RS Rate select

8 RX_LOS Receiver loss of signal indication

9 VeeR Module receiver ground

10 VeeR Module receiver ground

Table 30: SFP Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

11 VeeR Module receiver ground

12 RD- Receiver inverted data output

13 RD+ Receiver noninverted data output

14 VeeR Module receiver ground

15 VccR Module receiver 3.3 V supply

16 VccT Module transmitter 3.3 V supply

17 VeeT Module transmitter ground

18 TD+ Transmitter noninverted data input

19 TD- Transmitter inverted data input

20 VeeT Module transmitter ground

Table 31: SFP+ Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 VeeT Module transmitter ground

2 TX_Fault Module transmitter fault

3 TX_Disable Transmitter disabled

4 SDA 2-wire serial interface data line

Table 31: SFP+ Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

5 SCL- 2-wire serial interface clock

6 MOD_ABS Module absent

7 RS0 Rate select 0, optionally controls SFP+ module receiver

8 RX_LOS Receiver loss of signal indication

9 RS1 Rate select 1, optionally controls SFP+ transmitter

10 VeeR Module receiver ground

11 VeeR Module receiver ground

12 RD- Receiver inverted data output

13 RD+ Receiver noninverted data output

14 VeeR Module receiver ground

15 VccR Module receiver 3.3-V supply

16 VccT Module transmitter 3.3-V supply

17 VeeT Module transmitter ground

18 TD+ Transmitter noninverted data input

19 TD- Transmitter inverted data input

Table 31: SFP+ Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

20 VeeT Module transmitter ground

Table 32: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal

1 GND

2 TX2n

3 TX2p

4 GND

5 TX4n

6 TX4p

7 GND

8 ModSelL

9 LPMode_Reset

10 VccRx

11 SCL

12 SDA

13 GND
78

Table 32: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal

14 RX3p

15 RX3n

16 GND

17 RX1p

18 RX1n

19 GND

20 GND

21 RX2n

22 RX2p

23 GND

24 RX4n

25 RX4p

26 GND

27 ModPrsL

28 IntL
79

Table 32: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal

29 VccTx

30 Vcc1

31 Reserved

32 GND

33 TX3p

34 TX3n

35 GND

36 TX1p

37 TX1n

38 GND

SFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch

EX3400 switches have four uplink ports that support 1-gigabit SFP transceivers and 10-gigabit SFP+
transceivers.

Table 33 on page 80 provides the pinout information for the SFP+ uplink port connector.
80

Table 33: Connector Pinout Information for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port

Pin Signal Description

1 VeeT Module transmitter ground

2 TX_Fault Module transmitter fault

3 TX_Disable Transmitter disabled

4 SDA 2-wire serial interface data line

5 SCL- 2-wire serial interface clock

6 MOD_ABS Module absent

7 RS0 Rate select 0, optionally controls SFP+ module receiver

8 RX_LOS Receiver loss of signal indication

9 RS1 Rate select 1, optionally controls SFP+ transmitter

10 VeeR Module receiver ground

11 VeeR Module receiver ground

12 RD- Receiver inverted data output

13 RD+ Receiver noninverted data output

14 VeeR Module receiver ground

15 VccR Module receiver 3.3 V supply

Table 33: Connector Pinout Information for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

16 VccT Module transmitter 3.3 V supply

17 VeeT Module transmitter ground

18 TD+ Transmitter noninverted data input

19 TD- Transmitter inverted data input

20 VeeT Module transmitter ground

QSFP+ Uplink Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3400 Switch

EX3400 switches have two 40-Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports that support 40-gigabit QSFP+
transceivers.

Table 34 on page 81 provides the pinout information for the QSFP+ uplink port connector.

Table 34: Connector Pinout Information for the 40-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port

Pin Signal

1 GND

2 TX2n

3 TX2p

4 GND

5 TX4n
82

Table 34: Connector Pinout Information for the 40-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port (Continued)

Pin Signal

6 TX4p

7 GND

8 ModSelL

9 LPMode_Reset

10 VccRx

11 SCL

12 SDA

13 GND

14 RX3p

15 RX3n

16 GND

17 RX1p

18 RX1n

19 GND

20 GND
83

Table 34: Connector Pinout Information for the 40-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port (Continued)

Pin Signal

21 RX2n

22 RX2p

23 GND

24 RX4n

25 RX4p

26 GND

27 ModPrsL

28 IntL

29 VccTx

30 Vcc1

31 Reserved

32 GND

33 TX3p

34 TX3n

35 GND
84

Table 34: Connector Pinout Information for the 40-Gigabit Ethernet Uplink Port (Continued)

Pin Signal

36 TX1p

37 TX1n

38 GND

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information

The console port on a Juniper Networks device is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a management device such as a laptop or a desktop PC. If your laptop or
desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or desktop
PC to the device, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 socket adapter along with a USB to DB-9 plug
adapter.

Table 35 on page 84 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter.

Table 35: RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information

RJ-45 pin Signal DB-9 pin Signal

1 NC 8 CTS

2 NC 6 DSR

3 TxD 2 RxD

4 GND 5 GND

6 RxD 3 TxD

7 DCD 4 DTR
85

Table 35: RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information (Continued)

RJ-45 pin Signal DB-9 pin Signal

8 NC 7 RTS

EX3400 Virtual Chassis

IN THIS SECTION

Planning EX3400 Virtual Chassis | 85

Understanding EX3400 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration | 86

Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX3400 Switches | 86

Planning EX3400 Virtual Chassis

Before interconnecting EX3400 switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration, you must consider the
following factors:

• The number of switches in the Virtual Chassis and their location—You can interconnect a maximum
of 10 EX3400 switches to form a Virtual Chassis composed exclusively of EX3400 switches.

• Mounting—You can mount the switches in a single rack or install them on multiple racks. For
information about the size and strength of racks, see Rack Requirements.

• Cabling requirements for Virtual Chassis—You can interconnect EX3400 switches into a Virtual
Chassis by using the uplink ports configured as Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs). By default, the QSFP+
uplink ports are configured as VCPs.

For information about uplink port cabling requirements, see Management Cable Specifications.

• Power requirements—You must plan the installation site to meet the power requirements of the
switches in a Virtual Chassis. See "Power Specifications for EX3400 Switches" on page 37.
86

• License requirements—You must have license keys for all the devices. See Understanding Software
Licenses for EX Series Switches.

SEE ALSO

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55

Understanding EX3400 Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration

Virtual Chassis is a feature in Juniper Networks EX3400 Ethernet Switches that allows you to
interconnect two or more EX3400 switches, enabling them to operate as a unified, single, high-
bandwidth switch. You can interconnect a maximum of 10 EX3400 switches by using the uplink ports
configured as Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) to form a Virtual Chassis. By default, the QSFP+ uplink ports
are configured as VCPs.

All EX3400 switch models support Virtual Chassis, and you can interconnect different models, which
allows you to choose among a range of possible port configurations within the same Virtual Chassis.

The Virtual Chassis configuration includes a primary switch and a backup switch, with all other switches
in the configuration designated as linecard member switches. Virtual Chassis operation is managed
through the primary switch. Each switch in the Virtual Chassis is assigned a unique member ID.

Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX3400 Switches

You can install EX3400 switches on a single rack or in multiple racks, or in different wiring closets, and
interconnect them to form a Virtual Chassis.

You form an EX3400 Virtual Chassis by using uplink ports configured as Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs). By
default, the QSFP+ uplink ports are configured as VCPs.

The physical location of the switches in a Virtual Chassis is restricted only by the maximum length
supported for cables to connect the VCPs—in this case, the maximum length of the uplink port cables.
For the maximum cable length for the uplink port cables supported by an EX3400 switch, see "Pluggable
Transceivers Supported on EX3400 Switches" on page 59.

The following illustrations show examples of Virtual Chassis cabling configuration using SFP+ ports. The
examples are applicable to configuration using QSFP+ ports also.
87

NOTE: For increased availability and redundancy, we recommend that you always configure your
Virtual Chassis in a ring topology.

Figure 21 on page 87, Figure 22 on page 88, and Figure 23 on page 88 show six EX3400 switches
stacked vertically in a rack and interconnected in a ring topology.

Figure 21: EX3400 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology: Example 1
88

Figure 22: EX3400 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology: Example 2

Figure 23: EX3400 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology: Example 3

Figure 24 on page 89 and Figure 25 on page 89 show six EX3400 switches mounted on the top rows
of adjacent racks and interconnected in a ring topology.
89

Figure 24: EX3400 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using
Medium and Long Cables: Example 1

Figure 25: EX3400 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using
Medium and Long Cables: Example 2
3 CHAPTER

Initial Installation and Configuration

Unpacking and Mounting the EX3400 Switch | 91

Connecting the EX3400 to Power | 107

Connecting the EX3400 to External Devices | 122

Connecting the EX3400 to the Network | 127

Configuring Junos OS on the EX3400 | 131

Dashboard for EX Series Switches | 164

Unpacking and Mounting the EX3400 Switch

IN THIS SECTION

Unpacking an EX3400 Switch | 91

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX3400 Switch | 92

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs | 93

Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch | 93

Installing and Removing EX3400 Switch Hardware Components | 94

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface | 95

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet | 96

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet | 100

Mounting an EX3400 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet | 103

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Wall | 104

Unpacking an EX3400 Switch

The EX3400 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton, secured with foam packing material. The carton
also contains an accessory box.

CAUTION: EX3400 switches are maximally protected inside the shipping carton. Do
not unpack the switches until you are ready to begin installation.

To unpack the switch:

1. Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible, but where you
have enough room to remove the system components.
2. Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.
3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.
4. Remove the accessory box and verify the contents in it against the parts inventory on the label
attached to the carton.
5. Pull out the packing material holding the switch in place.
92

6. Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the switch. An
inventory of parts provided with the switch is provided in "Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an
EX3400 Switch" on page 92.
7. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the switch later.

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX3400 Switch

The EX3400 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton, secured with foam packing material. The carton
also contains an accessory box.

The switch shipment includes a packing list. Check the parts you receive in the switch shipping carton
against the items on the packing list. The parts shipped depend on the configuration you order.

If any part on the packing list is missing, contact your customer service representative or contact Juniper
customer care from within the U.S. or Canada by telephone at 1-888-314-5822. For international-dial or
direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see https://www.juniper.net/support/
requesting-support.html.

Table 36 on page 92 lists the parts and their quantities in the packing list.

Table 36: Parts List for an EX3400 Switch

Component Quantity

Switch with one power supply and two fan modules 1

AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location (only for AC switch models) 1

Power cord retainer clip (only for AC switch models) 1

Mounting brackets 2

Mounting screws to attach the mounting brackets to the switch chassis 8

Rubber feet 4

Documentation Roadmap 1
93

Table 36: Parts List for an EX3400 Switch (Continued)

Component Quantity

Juniper Networks Product Warranty 1

End User License Agreement 1

NOTE: You must provide mounting screws that are appropriate for your rack or cabinet to mount
the chassis on a rack or a cabinet.

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs

Register all new Juniper Networks hardware products and changes to an existing installed product using
the Juniper Networks website to activate your hardware replacement service-level agreements (SLAs).

CAUTION: Register product serial numbers on the Juniper Networks website. Update
the installation base data if any addition or change to the installation base occurs or if
the installation base is moved. Juniper Networks is not responsible for not meeting the
hardware replacement service-level agreement for products that do not have registered
serial numbers or accurate installation base data.
Register your product(s) at https://tools.juniper.net/svcreg/SRegSerialNum.jsp.
Update your installation base at https://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/
updateinstallbase.jsp.

Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch

To install and connect an EX3400 switch:

1. Follow instructions in "Unpacking an EX3400 Switch" on page 91.

2. Mount the switch by following instructions appropriate for your site:

• "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface" on page 95 (using the rubber
feet provided)
94

• "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet" on page 96 (using the
mounting brackets provided)

• "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet" on page 100 (using the
separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit)

• "Mounting an EX3400 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet" on page 103 (using the
2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit)

• "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Wall" on page 104 (using the separately orderable wall-mount
kit)
3. Follow instructions in Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch.
4. Follow instructions in "Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch" on page 118 or "Connecting DC
Power to an EX3400 Switch" on page 119.
5. Perform initial configuration of the switch by following instructions in Connecting and Configuring an
EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure).
6. Set the switch’s management options by following the appropriate instructions:
• Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

• Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ-45 Connector

SEE ALSO

Rack Requirements | 52
Cabinet Requirements | 54
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55

Installing and Removing EX3400 Switch Hardware Components

The EX3400 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the hardware components. The
field-replaceable units (FRUs) in EX3400 switches are:

• Power supplies

• Fan modules

• Transceivers

The power supplies and fan modules are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace
them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
95

See these topics for instructions for installing and removing components:

• "Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch" on page 206

• "Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch" on page 205

• "Installing a Fan Module in an EX3400 Switch" on page 203

• "Removing a Fan Module from an EX3400 Switch" on page 202

• "Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch" on page 210

• "Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch" on page 208

• Install a Transceiver

• Remove a Transceiver

SEE ALSO

EX3400 Cooling System | 24

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 28
Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX3400 Switches | 59

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface

Before mounting the switch on a desk or other level surface:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400
Switches" on page 40.

• Place the desk in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure it to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• 4 rubber feet to stabilize the chassis on a desk or other level surface (provided in the accessory box
in the switch carton)

You can mount an EX3400 switch on a desk or other level surface by using the four rubber feet that are
shipped with the switch. The rubber feet stabilize the chassis.
96

To mount a switch on a desk or other level surface:

1. Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpacking an EX3400 Switch" on page 91).
2. Turn the chassis upside down on the desk or the level surface where you intend to mount the switch.
3. Attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the chassis, as shown in Figure 26 on page 96.
4. Turn the chassis right side up on the desk or the level surface.
5. Ensure that the switch rests firmly on the desk or the level surface.

Figure 26: Attaching Rubber Feet to a Switch Chassis

1— Rubber feet

SEE ALSO

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3400 Switches | 55

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet

Before mounting the switch on two posts in a rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400
Switches" on page 40.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure it to the building structure.
97

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 (not provided)

• 2 mounting brackets and 8 mounting screws (provided)

• Screws to secure the chassis to the rack (not provided)

• 2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets (from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit) if you
will mount the switch in a recessed position

You can mount an EX3400 switch on two posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the mounting
brackets provided with the switch. (The remainder of this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.)

You can mount the switch on four posts of a four-post rack by using the mounting brackets provided
with the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit. See "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Four Posts
in a Rack or Cabinet" on page 100.

NOTE: If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position on either a two-post rack or a
four-post rack, you can use the 2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets provided in the separately
orderable four-post rack-mount kit.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another secures the switch to the
rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack and mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the top in
decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount the switch on two posts in a rack:

1. Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpacking an EX3400 Switch" on page 91).
2. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.
3. Align the mounting brackets along the front or rear of the side panels of the switch chassis
depending on how you want to mount the switch. For example, if you want to front-mount the
switch, align the brackets along the front of the chassis. See Figure 27 on page 98.
98

Figure 27: Attaching the Mounting Bracket Along the Front of the Switch

NOTE: If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position, use the 2-in.-recess front-
mounting brackets from the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit.

4. Align the bottom holes in the mounting brackets with the holes on the side panels of the switch
chassis.
5. Insert the mounting screws into the aligned holes.
6. Ensure that the other holes in the mounting brackets are aligned with the holes in the side panels.
Insert a screw in each hole and tighten the screws.
7. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the mounting bracket holes with the threaded holes in the rack or cabinet rail. Align the bottom hole
in each mounting bracket with a hole in each rack rail, making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 28
on page 99.
99

Figure 28: Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack

8. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws. Tighten the
screws.
9. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all screws on one side of the rack are aligned
with the screws on the other side.

SEE ALSO

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 108

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118
Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119
Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152
Mounting an EX3400 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet | 103
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263
100

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet

Before mounting the switch on four posts in a rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400
Switches" on page 40.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure it to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• 6 flat-head 4-40 mounting screws (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)

• 8 flat-head 4x6-mm Phillips mounting screws (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)

• One pair each of flush or 2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets (provided with the four-post rack-
mount kit)

• One pair of side mounting-rails (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)

• One pair of rear-mounting blades (provided with the four-post rack-mount kit)

• Screws to secure the chassis and the rear-mounting blades to the rack (not provided)

You can mount an EX3400 switch on four posts of a 19-in. rack or cabinet by using the separately
orderable four-post rack-mount kit. (The remainder of this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.)

You can mount the switch on two posts in either a two-post rack or a four-post rack by using the
mounting brackets provided with the switch. See "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack
or Cabinet" on page 96.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another secures the switch to the
rack.
101

To mount the switch on four posts in a rack:

1. Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpacking an EX3400 Switch" on page 91).
2. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.
3. Attach the front-mounting brackets (either the flush or the 2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets) to
the side mounting-rails by using the 6 4-40 flat-head Phillips mounting screws. See Figure 29 on
page 101.

Figure 29: Attaching the Front-Mounting Bracket to the Side Mounting-Rail

1— Side mounting-rail 2— Front-mounting bracket

4. Align the side mounting-rails along the side panels of the switch chassis. Align the two holes in the
rear of the side mounting-rails with the two holes on the rear of the side panel.
5. Insert 4x6-mm Phillips flat-head mounting screws into the two aligned holes and tighten the
screws. Ensure that the two holes in the rear of the side mounting-rails are aligned with the
remaining two holes in the side panel. See Figure 30 on page 102.
102

Figure 30: Attaching the Side Mounting-Rail to the Switch Chassis

6. Insert the 4x6-mm Phillips flat-head mounting screws into the remaining two holes in the side
mounting-rails and tighten the screws.
7. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the side mounting-rail holes with the threaded holes in the front post of the rack. Align the bottom
hole in both the front-mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure the chassis is
level. See Figure 31 on page 102.

Figure 31: Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack

8. Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws for
your rack.
9. Slide the rear-mounting blades into the side mounting-rails. See Figure 32 on page 103.
103

Figure 32: Sliding the Rear-Mounting Blades into the Side Mounting-Rails

10. Attach the rear-mounting blades to the rear post by using the appropriate screws for your rack.
Tighten the screws.
11. Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all the screws on the front of the rack are
aligned with the screws at the back of the rack.

SEE ALSO

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 108

Mounting an EX3400 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet

You can mount an EX3400 switch in a rack or cabinet such that the switch is recessed inside the rack
from the front of the rack by 2 inches. You can use the 2-in.-recess front-mounting brackets provided in
the separately orderable four-post rack-mount kit to mount the switch in a recessed position.

Reasons that you might want to mount the switch in a recessed position include:

• You are mounting the switch in a cabinet and the cabinet doors do not close completely unless the
switch is recessed.

• The switch you are mounting has transceivers installed in the uplink ports and the transceivers in the
uplink ports protrude from the front of the switch.
104

To mount the switch in a recessed position on four posts, follow the instructions in "Mounting an
EX3400 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet" on page 100. To mount the switch in a recessed
position on two posts, follow the instructions in "Mounting an EX3400 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or
Cabinet" on page 96.

SEE ALSO

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 108

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263

Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Wall

Before mounting the switch on a wall:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for EX3400
Switches" on page 40.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• 2 wall-mounting brackets (provided in the wall-mount kit)

• 12 wall-mounting bracket screws (provided in the wall-mount kit)

• 6 mounting screws (8-32 x 1.25 in. or M4 x 30 mm) (not provided)

• Hollow wall anchors rated to support up to 75 lb (34 kg) if you are not screwing the screws directly
into wall studs (not provided)

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

You can mount an EX3400 switch on a wall by using the separately orderable wall-mount kit.

To mount one or two switches on a wall:

1. Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpacking an EX3400 Switch" on page 91).
2. Attach the wall-mounting brackets to the sides of the chassis using four wall-mounting bracket
screws on each side, as shown in Figure 33 on page 105.
105

Figure 33: Attaching Wall-Mounting Brackets to a Switch Chassis

3. Install six mounting screws in the wall for the wall-mounting brackets at the location shown in Figure
34 on page 106:

NOTE: Tighten the screws only part way in, leaving about 1/4 in. (6 mm) distance between
the head of the screw and the wall.

a. Drill a hole A and install a mounting screw.

b. Drill a hole B at a distance of 5.98 in. (15.2 cm) from screw A on a level line to the right and install
a mounting screw.

c. Drill a hole C at a distance of 18.67 in. (47.43 cm) on a plumb line down from screw A and install a
mounting screw.
106

d. Drill a hole D at a distance of 18.67 in. (47.43 cm) on a plumb line down from screw B and install a
mounting screw.

Figure 34: Measurements for Installing Mounting Screws

4. Place the switch against the wall such that the front panel of the switch faces to the right side and
the holes in the mounting brackets heads align with the mounting screw heads.
5. Slide the switch chassis to the left or right a bit so that the mounting screws are pushed into the
channels of the holes in the mounting brackets until the switch rests firmly in place as shown in
Figure 35 on page 107.
6. Tighten all mounting screws.
107

Figure 35: Mounting the Switch on a Wall

SEE ALSO

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119
Mounting an EX3400 Switch on a Wall | 104

Connecting the EX3400 to Power

IN THIS SECTION

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 108

108

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 118

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch | 119

Connect Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

IN THIS SECTION

Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground | 108

Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 115

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch | 117

To ensure proper operation and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements,
you must connect an EX Series switch to earth ground before you connect power to the switch. You
must use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect the switch to earth ground
(see Figure 37 on page 117).

You must install the EX Series switch in a restricted–access location and ensure that the chassis is
always properly grounded. EX Series switches have a two–hole protective grounding terminal provided
on the chassis. See Table 37 on page 109 for the location of the earthing terminals on various EX Series
switches. Under all circumstances, use this grounding connection to ground the chassis. For AC-
powered systems, you must also use the grounding wire in the AC power cord along with the two-hole
grounding lug connection. This tested system meets or exceeds all applicable EMC regulatory
requirements with the two-hole protective grounding terminal.

Ensure that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable you
supply. Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch.

Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground

Before you begin connecting an EX Series switch to earth ground, ensure you have the parts and tools
required for your switch.

Table 37 on page 109 lists the earthing terminal location, grounding cable and lug specifications, and
parts needed for connecting an EX Series switch to earth ground.
109

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX2200 Rear panel of 14 AWG Panduit • Two

the chassis (2 mm²), LCC10-14BWL or 10-32 x .25 i
minimum 90° C equivalent— n. screws
wire, or as not provided with #10
permitted by split-lock
the local code washer—
not provided

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided

EX2300-C Rear panel of 14 AWG Panduit • Two

the chassis (2 mm²), LCC10-14AW-L or 10-32 x .25 i
minimum 90° C equivalent— n. screws
wire, or as not provided with #10
permitted by split-lock
the local code washer—
not provided

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided
110

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX2300 Rear panel of • EX2300 • EX2300 • EX2300

the chassis switches switches except switches
except EX2300-24MP except
EX2300-24 and EX2300-24
MP and EX2300-48MP MP and
EX2300-48 models—Panduit EX2300-48
MP models LCC10-14AW-L MP models
—14 AWG or equivalent—
(2 mm²), not provided • Two
minimum 10-32
90°C wire, • EX2300-24MP x .25 in.
or as and screws
permitted by EX2300-48MP with #10
the local models—Panduit split-lock
code LCA10-10L or washer—
equivalent—not not
• EX2300-24 provided provided
MP and
EX2300-48 • Two #10
MP models flat
—14-10 washers
AWG STR —not
(2.5-6 mm²), provided
12-10 AWG
• EX2300-24
SOL (4-6
MP and
mm²)
EX2300-48
minimum
MP models
90°C wire,
or as • One Pan
permitted by Phillips
the local M4x6
code—not mm
provided Nickel
plated
screw—
provided
111

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX3200 Rear panel of 14 AWG Panduit • Two For EX3200

and the chassis (2 mm²), LCC10-14BWL or 10-32 x .25 i Switches, see
EX3300 minimum 90° C equivalent— n. screws "Special Instructions
wire, or as not provided with #10 to Follow Before
permitted by split-lock Connecting Earth
the local code washer— Ground to an EX
not provided Series Switch" on
page 115.
• Two #10 flat
washers—
not provided

EX3400 Rear panel of 14-10 AWG Panduit • Two

the chassis STR (2.5-6 LCD10-10A-L or 10-32 x .25 i
mm²), minimum equivalent— n. screws
90° C wire, or not provided with #10
as permitted by split-lock
the local code washer—
not provided

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided

EX4200 Left side of 14 AWG Panduit • Two 10-32 See "Special

the chassis (2 mm²), LCC10-14BWL or x .25 in. Instructions to
minimum 90° C equivalent— screws with Follow Before
wire, or as not provided #10 split- Connecting Earth
permitted by lock washer Ground to an EX
the local code — Series Switch" on
not provided page 115.

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided
112

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX4300 Rear panel of 14-10 AWG Panduit • Two 10-32

switches the chassis STR (2.5-6 LCD10-10A-L or x .25 in.
except mm²), minimum equivalent— screws with
EX4300-4 90° C wire, or not provided #10 split-
8MP and as permitted by lock washer
EX4300-4 the local code —
8MP-S not provided
switches
• Two #10 flat
washers—
not provided

EX4300-4 Rear panel of 14-10 AWG Panduit • Two 10-32

8MP and the chassis STR (2.5-6 LCD10-14B-L, x .25 in.
EX4300-4 mm²), minimum LCC10-BW-L, or screws with
8MP-S 90° C wire, or equivalent— #10 split-
switches as permitted by not provided lock washer
the local code —
not provided

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided

EX4500 Left side of 14 AWG Panduit • Two 10-32 See "Special

and the chassis (2 mm²), LCC10-14BWL or x .25 in. Instructions to
EX4550 minimum 90° C equivalent— screws with Follow Before
wire, or as not provided #10 split- Connecting Earth
permitted by lock washer Ground to an EX
the local code — Series Switch" on
not provided page 115.

• Two #10 flat

washers—
not provided
113

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX6210 Rear panel of The grounding Panduit LCD2-14A- • Two ¼ -20

the chassis cable must be Q or equivalent x 0.5 in.
(on lower left the same gauge —provided screws with
side) as the power #¼” split-
feed cables and washer
as permitted by —provided
the local code.
• Two #¼” flat
washers—
provided

EX8208 Left side of 6 AWG Panduit LCD2-14A- • Two ¼ -20

the chassis (13.3 mm²), Q or equivalent x 0.5 in.
minimum 90° C —provided screws with
wire, or as #¼” split-
permitted by washer
the local code —provided

• Two #¼” flat

washers—
provided
114

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX8216 Two earthing 2 AWG Panduit LCD2-14A- • Two ¼ -20 x

terminals: (33.6 mm²), Q or equivalent 0.5 in.
minimum 90° C —provided screws with
• Left side wire, or as #¼” split-
of the permitted by washer
chassis the local code —provided

• Rear
• Two #¼” flat
panel of
washers—
the
provided
chassis

NOTE: You
must use
only one of
the two
protective
earthing
terminals.

EX9204, Rear panel of One 6 AWG Thomas& Betts • Two ¼ -20 See Grounding
EX9208, the chassis (13.3 mm²), LCN6-14 or x 0.5 in. Cable and Lug
and minimum 90° C equivalent— screws with Specifications for
EX9214 wire, or one provided #¼” split- EX9200 Switches.
that complies washer—
with the local provided
code
• Two #¼” flat
washers—
provided
115

Table 37: Parts Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground (Continued)

Switch Earthing Grounding Grounding Lug Screws and Additional

Terminal Cable Specifications Washers Information
Location Requirements

EX9251 Rear panel of 12 AWG Panduit Two 10-32 See Grounding

the chassis (2.5 mm²), LCD10-10A-L or screws— Cable and Lug
minimum 90° C equivalent— provided Specifications for
wire, or one not provided EX9200 Switches.
that complies
with the local
code—
not provided

EX9253 Right side of 14-10 AWG Panduit Two M5 Pan

the chassis (2-5.3 mm²), LCD10-14B-L or Head screws—
minimum 90° C equivalent— provided
wire, or one provided
that complies
with the local
code—
not provided

Tools required for connecting an EX Series switch to earth ground:

• An electrostatic discharge grounding strap (provided)

• A Phillips (+) number 2 screwdriver to tighten the screws.

An AC–powered EX Series switch gains additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the
switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord appropriate for your geographical
location.

Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

Table 38 on page 116 lists the special instructions that you might need to follow before connecting
earth ground to a switch.
116

Table 38: Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

Switch Special Instructions

EX3200 and Some early variants of EX3200 and EX4200 switches for which the Juniper Networks
EX4200 model number on the label next to the protective earthing terminal is from 750-021xxx
through 750-030xxx require 10-24x.25 in. screws.

EX4200, EX4500, If you plan to mount your switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, mount your switch in
and EX4550 the rack or cabinet before attaching the grounding lug to the switch.

NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on switches mounted on four posts of a rack is
accessible through the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. (69.85 cm)
through 30.5 in. (77.47 cm) deep for a switch mounted flush with the rack front and
29.5 in. (74.93 cm) through 32.5 in. (82.55 cm) deep for a switch mounted 2 in. (5.08 cm)
recessed from the rack front. See Figure 36 on page 116.

Figure 36: Connecting the Grounding Lug to a Switch Mounted on Four Posts of
a Rack

1— Protective earthing terminal 3— Grounding lug

2— Side mounting-rail 4— Rear mounting-blade

NOTE: The brackets must be attached to the chassis before the grounding lug is attached.
(The brackets are shown pulled away from the chassis so that the protective earthing
terminal is seen.)
117

Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch

To connect earth ground to an EX Series switch:

1. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug to the grounding cable.

2. Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack in which the
switch is mounted.

3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD grounding point
on the switch.

4. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal. See
Figure 37 on page 117.

Figure 37: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch

5. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with the washers and screws.

6. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch
components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it.

SEE ALSO

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings

Grounded Equipment Warning
118

Connecting AC Power to an EX3400 Switch

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A power cord appropriate for your geographical location

• A power cord retainer clip (provided with the switch)

Ensure that you have connected the device chassis to earth ground. The AC power cords provide
additional grounding when you connect the power supply in the switch to a grounded AC power outlet
by using the AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location (see "AC Power Cord
Specifications for EX3400 Switches" on page 31).

CAUTION: For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis,
have a licensed electrician complete this connection before you connect the switch to
power. For instructions on connecting earth ground, see Connect Earth Ground to an
EX Series Switch.

The power supply is installed in the power supply slot on the rear panel of the switch.

To connect AC power to the switch:

1. Push the end of the power cord retainer strip into the slot above the power cord inlet until the strip
snaps into place. Ensure that the loop in the retainer strip faces the power cord (see Figure 38 on
page 119).
The power cord retainer clip extends out of the chassis by 3 in. (7.62 cm)
2. Press the small tab on the retainer strip to loosen the loop. Slide the loop until there is enough space
to insert the power cord coupler into the power cord inlet.
3. Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the switch; the cords have plugs appropriate for your
geographical location. See "AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3400 Switches" on page 31.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cord does not drape where people can trip on it or
block access to switch components.

4. Insert the power cord coupler firmly into the power cord inlet (see Figure 39 on page 119).
5. Slide the loop toward the power supply until it is snug against the base of the coupler.
6. Press the tab on the loop and draw out the loop into a tight circle.
7. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.
8. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.
9. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the ON (|) position.
119

Figure 38: Connecting an AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to the AC Power Cord Inlet

Figure 39: Connecting an AC Power Cord to the AC Power Cord Inlet

SEE ALSO

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 28

Connecting DC Power to an EX3400 Switch

Before you begin connecting DC power to the switch, ensure that you have connected earth ground to
the switch chassis.

CAUTION: To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to

ensure proper operation, you must connect the switch to earth ground before you
connect them to power. For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to
120

the chassis, use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to the
earth ground. For instructions on connecting earth ground, see Connect Earth Ground
to an EX Series Switch.

NOTE: Grounding is required for DC systems and recommended for AC systems.

Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage
(see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

Install the power supply in the chassis. For instructions on installing a DC power supply in an EX3400
switch, see "Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch" on page 210.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• DC power source cables (14–16 AWG) (not provided)

• Wire pins (Molex 192120005) (not provided)

• Terminal connector (provided)

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• Slotted (-) screwdriver

The power supply is installed in the power supply slot in the rear panel.

WARNING: DC-powered switches are intended for installation only in a restricted-

access location.

To connect DC power to the switch:

1. Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the cable leads do not become active while you
are connecting DC power.

NOTE: The DC power inlet in the switch has two terminals labeled + and – and has a terminal
to connect to earth ground. The DC power inlet has a clear plastic cover.

NOTE: The + terminal is referred to as +RTN and – terminal is referred to as –48 V in DC

Power Wiring Sequence Warning and DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines.
121

2. Grasp the plastic cover in the middle, gently bend it outward, and pull it out. Save the cover.
3. Loosen the screws on the terminal connector by using the screwdriver.
4. Strip 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) of the insulator from one end of the power cable. Attach the two wires to
the wire pins.
5. Secure the wire pins to the appropriate terminals on the terminal connector by using the screws from
the terminal connector (see Figure 40 on page 121).

Figure 40: Securing Wire Pins to the Terminals on the Terminal Connector

• To connect the wire pins to the appropriate terminals on the terminal connector:

a. Connect the positive (+) wire pin to the + terminal on the terminal connector.

b. Connect the negative (–) wire pin to the – terminal on the terminal connector.

c. Ensure that the pins are fully inserted into the terminal connector.

d. Tighten each screw on the terminal connector until snug by using the screwdriver. Do not
overtighten—apply 4.5 lb-in. (0.51 Nm) of torque to the screws.
6. Insert the terminal connector (with the power cable attached) into the power supply socket on the
switch and secure it by tightening the two screws on either side of the terminal connector (see Figure
41 on page 122).
122

Figure 41: Securing the Terminal Connector to the DC Power Inlet

NOTE: To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source that
is capable of supplying a minimum of 7.5 A at –48 VDC.

7. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power source.
8. Close the input circuit breaker.
9. Verify that the IN OK and the OUT OK LEDs are lit green and on steadily.

SEE ALSO

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152

DC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 33

Connecting the EX3400 to External Devices

IN THIS SECTION

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 123

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector | 123

Connect an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Using the Mini-USB Type-B Console Port | 125
123

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable that has an RJ-45 connector at either end. Figure 42 on page
123 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable.

Figure 42: RJ-45 Connector on an Ethernet Cable

You can monitor and manage these devices by using a dedicated management channel. Each device has
a management port to which you can connect an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector. Use the
management port to connect the device to the management device.

To connect a device to a network for out-of-band management (see Figure 43 on page 123):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port on the device.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.

Figure 43: Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable that has an RJ-45 connector at either end and an RJ-45-to-DB-9
serial port adapter.
124

Figure 44 on page 124 shows the RJ-45 connector on the Ethernet cable.

Figure 44: RJ-45 Connector on an Ethernet Cable

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

NOTE: If your laptop or desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or desktop PC directly to the device, use a combination of the RJ-45-to-
DB-9 socket adapter and a USB-to-DB-9 plug adapter. You must provide the USB-to-DB-9 plug
adapter.

You can configure and manage your network devices using a dedicated management channel. Each
device has a console port that you can connect to using an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector. Use
the console port to connect the device to the console server or management console. The console port
accepts a cable that has an RJ-45 connector.

To connect the device to a management console (see Figure 45 on page 125 and Figure 46 on page
125):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the console port (labeled CON, CONSOLE, or CON1) on
the device.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the console server (see Figure 45 on page 125) or
management console (see Figure 46 on page 125).
125

Figure 45: Connect a Device to a Management Console Through a Console Server

Figure 46: Connect a Device Directly to a Management Console

Connect an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Using the Mini-

USB Type-B Console Port

Before You Begin

Before you connect the switch using the Mini-USB Type-B console port:

• Ensure that the USB to Serial driver is installed on the host machine.

• Ensure that the HyperTerminal properties of the console server or laptop are set as follows:

• Baud rate—9600

• Flow control—None

• Data—8

• Parity—None

• Stop bits—1

• DCD state—Disregard

You will need the following parts and tools:

• One mini-USB cable with Standard-A and Mini-USB Type-B (5-pin) connectors (not provided)
126

EX2200-C, EX2300, EX2300-C , EX3400, EX4300, and EX4550 switches, except EX2300-24MP and
EX2300-48MP models, have two console ports: an RJ-45 console port that accepts a cable with an
RJ-45 connector and a Mini-USB Type-B console port that accepts a cable with a Mini-USB Type-B plug
(5-pin) connector. You can configure and manage the switch using the RJ-45 console port or the Mini-
USB Type-B console port. On EX2200-C and EX4550 switches, only one console port is active at a time
and the console input is active only on that port. On EX2300, EX2300-C, EX3400, and EX4300
switches, both the RJ-45 console port and the Mini-USB Type-B console port can be active at the same
time.

NOTE: EX2300-24MP and EX2300-48MP models only have an RJ-45 console port.

By default, the RJ-45 console port is the active port. If your laptop or PC does not have a DB-9 plug
connector pin or RJ-45 connector pin, you can connect your laptop or PC directly to the switch using a
mini-USB cable that has a Standard-A USB connector on one end and a Mini-USB Type-B (5-pin)
connector on the other end. You must first configure the Mini-USB Type-B console port as the active
port before you can use it to connect to the switch.

This topic describes the procedure to connect EX2200-C, EX2300, EX2300-C, EX3400, EX4300, and
EX4550 switches to the management console using the Mini-USB Type-B console port.

For information about configuring and managing an EX Series switch using the RJ-45 console port, see
Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ-45 Connector.

To connect the switch to the console using the Mini-USB Type-B console port:

1. Connect the host machine to the device directly using the active console port or remotely using the
management interface. To connect using the active console port, which is the RJ-45 console port by
default, see Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ-45 Connector.
2. Connect the Standard-A connector of the mini-USB cable to the host machine (PC or laptop).
3. Connect the Mini-USB Type-B (5-pin) connector of the mini-USB cable to the Mini-USB Type-B
console port (labeled CON) on the switch.
4. By default, the RJ-45 port is set as an active console port and the Mini-USB Type-B port is the
passive console port. Set the Mini-USB Type-B console port as the active console port using the port-
type command. See Configuring the Console Port Type (CLI Procedure).
5. Reboot the switch. The boot log appears on the activated console.

After the connection is established, the Mini-USB Type-B becomes the active console port. The host
machine connected to the Mini-USB Type-B console port displays log messages and you can control
switch functionality through it. On EX2300, EX2300-C, EX3400, and EX4300 switches, both the Mini-
USB Type-B and RJ-45 console ports are now active. On EX2200-C and EX4550 switches, the Mini-USB
Type-B console port is active and the RJ-45 console port is passive.
127

Connecting the EX3400 to the Network

IN THIS SECTION

Install a Transceiver | 127

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 130

Install a Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides

third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent

Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

Figure 47 on page 130 shows how to install a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all types
of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To install a transceiver:

CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not

touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
2. Remove the transceiver from its bag.
3. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the
transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when

inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

4. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover, remove the dust
cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are hot-swapping a transceiver, wait
for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver from the port before installing a new
transceiver.
5. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors must face the
chassis.

CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure that the transceiver is
aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver
unusable.

6. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated. If you are installing a CFP transceiver, use your
fingers to tighten the captive screws on the transceiver.
129

7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable connected to a
transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or

removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

8. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its
own weight as it hangs toward the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in
the cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

NOTE: When you install SFP-DD transceivers, push it hard until you hear a click sound. Use a
long nose plier to pull the SFP-DD transceiver connected on the top and bottom rows of the
chassis where the pull tabs face each other.

NOTE: Make sure to use a dust cap to cover ports that are unused.
130

NOTE: While using Finisar AOC SFP+ optical module with the QFX5130-48C switch, you
may need to pull the module upwards to pull out the module smoothly from the cage.

NOTE: "

Figure 47: Install a Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable

Before you connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device, ensure that you
have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines
and Warnings).

To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device:

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered with a rubber safety cap, remove the cap. Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 48 on page 131).
131

Figure 48: Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in a Device

Fiber-optic Transceiver
cable

g000704
4. Secure the cables so that they do not support their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in
a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables maintain their shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened
loops of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at the fastening point.

Configuring Junos OS on the EX3400

IN THIS SECTION

EX3400 Switch Default Configuration | 131

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) | 152

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure) | 156

Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch | 159

EX3400 Switch Default Configuration

Each EX Series switch is programmed with a factory-default configuration that contains the values set
for each configuration parameter when a switch is shipped.

The EX3400 switch default configuration:

132

• Sets Ethernet switching and storm control on all interfaces

• Sets Power over Ethernet (PoE) on all RJ-45 ports of models that provide PoE

• Enables the following protocols:

• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

• Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)

• Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED)

When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that becomes the
active configuration. You can always revert to the factory-default configuration. See Reverting to the
Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.

NOTE: The factory-default configuration file is different for different EX3400 switch models.
The number of interfaces in the default configuration file depends on the number of ports in the
EX3400 switch.

The poe statement does not appear for models without PoE.

The four uplink ports on the front panel of EX3400 switches are listed as ge-0/2/0 through ge-0/2/3
and xe-0/2/0 through xe-0/2/3.

The following is the factory-default configuration file for an EX3400 switch with 24 ports with PoE
capability that runs Junos OS Release 18.2R3 or later.

system {
auto-snapshot;
phone-home {
server https://redirect.juniper.net;
rfc-compliant;
}
services {
ssh;
netconf {
ssh;
rfc-compliant;
yang-compliant;
}
}
133

}
protocols {
lldp {
interface all;
}
lldp-med {
interface all;
}
igmp-snooping {
vlan default;
}
rstp {
interface ge-0/0/0;
interface ge-0/0/1;
interface ge-0/0/2;
interface ge-0/0/3;
interface ge-0/0/4;
interface ge-0/0/5;
interface ge-0/0/6;
interface ge-0/0/7;
interface ge-0/0/8;
interface ge-0/0/9;
interface ge-0/0/10;
interface ge-0/0/11;
interface ge-0/0/12;
interface ge-0/0/13;
interface ge-0/0/14;
interface ge-0/0/15;
interface ge-0/0/16;
interface ge-0/0/17;
interface ge-0/0/18;
interface ge-0/0/19;
interface ge-0/0/20;
interface ge-0/0/21;
interface ge-0/0/22;
interface ge-0/0/23;
interface xe-0/2/0;
interface xe-0/2/1;
interface xe-0/2/2;
interface xe-0/2/3;
interface ge-0/2/0;
interface ge-0/2/1;
interface ge-0/2/2;
134

interface ge-0/2/3;
}
}
forwarding-options {
storm-control-profiles default {
all;
}
}
poe {
interface all;
}
interfaces {
## For phone-home connectivity to PHS enable dhcp on vme and irb.
vme {
unit 0 {
family inet {
dhcp;
}
}
}
irb {
unit 0 {
family inet {
dhcp;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/2 {
unit 0 {
135

family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/4 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/5 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/6 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/7 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/8 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
136

storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/9 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/10 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/11 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/12 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/13 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/14 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
137

}
}
}
ge-0/0/15 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/16 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/17 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/18 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/19 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/20 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
138

}
}
ge-0/0/21 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/22 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/23 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/2 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
139

}
xe-0/2/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/2 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
}
groups {
junos-defaults {
protocols {
igmp {
interface me0.0 {
disable;
140

}
interface vme.0 {
disable;
}
}
}
}
}
system {
commit {
factory-settings {
reset-chassis-lcd-menu;
reset-virtual-chassis-configuration;
}
}
}
chassis {
redundancy {
graceful-switchover;
}
}
vlans {
default {
vlan-id 1;
l3-interface irb.0;
}
}

The following is the factory-default configuration file for an EX3400 switch with 48 ports with PoE
capability that runs a version of Junos OS release earlier than 18.2R3.

system {
auto-snapshot;
syslog {
user * {
any emergency;
}
file messages {
any notice;
authorization info;
}
file interactive-commands {
141

interactive-commands any;
}
}
commit {
factory-settings {
reset-virtual-chassis-configuration;
reset-chassis-lcd-menu;
}
}
}
interfaces {
ge-0/0/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/2 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/4 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
142

}
}
}
ge-0/0/5 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/6 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/7 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/8 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/9 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/10 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
143

}
}
ge-0/0/11 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/12 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/13 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/14 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/15 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/16 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
144

}
ge-0/0/17 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/18 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/19 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/20 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/21 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/22 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
145

ge-0/0/23 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/24 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/25 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/26 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/27 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/28 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/29 {
146

unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/30 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/31 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/32 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/33 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/34 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/35 {
unit 0 {
147

family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/36 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/37 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/38 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/39 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/40 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/41 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
148

storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/42 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/43 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/44 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/45 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/46 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/0/47 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
149

}
}
}
ge-0/2/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/0 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/1 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
ge-0/2/2 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/2 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
150

}
}
ge-0/2/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
xe-0/2/3 {
unit 0 {
family ethernet-switching {
storm-control default;
}
}
}
}
forwarding-options {
storm-control-profiles default {
all;
}
}
protocols {
lldp {
interface all;
}
lldp-med {
interface all;
}
igmp-snooping {
vlan default;
}
rstp {
interface ge-0/0/0;
interface ge-0/0/1;
interface ge-0/0/2;
interface ge-0/0/3;
interface ge-0/0/4;
interface ge-0/0/5;
interface ge-0/0/6;
interface ge-0/0/7;
interface ge-0/0/8;
interface ge-0/0/9;
151

interface ge-0/0/10;
interface ge-0/0/11;
interface ge-0/0/12;
interface ge-0/0/13;
interface ge-0/0/14;
interface ge-0/0/15;
interface ge-0/0/16;
interface ge-0/0/17;
interface ge-0/0/18;
interface ge-0/0/19;
interface ge-0/0/20;
interface ge-0/0/21;
interface ge-0/0/22;
interface ge-0/0/23;
interface ge-0/0/24;
interface ge-0/0/25;
interface ge-0/0/26;
interface ge-0/0/27;
interface ge-0/0/28;
interface ge-0/0/29;
interface ge-0/0/30;
interface ge-0/0/31;
interface ge-0/0/32;
interface ge-0/0/33;
interface ge-0/0/34;
interface ge-0/0/35;
interface ge-0/0/36;
interface ge-0/0/37;
interface ge-0/0/38;
interface ge-0/0/39;
interface ge-0/0/40;
interface ge-0/0/41;
interface ge-0/0/42;
interface ge-0/0/43;
interface ge-0/0/44;
interface ge-0/0/45;
interface ge-0/0/46;
interface ge-0/0/47;
interface ge-0/2/0;
interface xe-0/2/0;
interface ge-0/2/1;
interface xe-0/2/1;
interface ge-0/2/2;
152

interface xe-0/2/2;
interface ge-0/2/3;
interface xe-0/2/3;
}
}
poe {
interface all;
}

SEE ALSO

Configuration Files Terms

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)
EX3400 Switches Hardware Overview | 2

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)

Using the CLI, set the following parameter values in the console server or PC:

• Baud rate—9600

• Flow control—None

• Data—8

• Parity—None

• Stop bits—1

• DCD state—Disregard

There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through the console by
using the CLI and the other is by using the J-Web interface.

NOTE: EX2200-24T-4G-DC switches do not support switch connection and configuration

through the J-Web interface.

This topic describes the CLI procedure.

153

NOTE: To run the ezsetup script, the switch must have the factory-default configuration as the
active configuration. If you have configured anything on the switch and want to run ezsetup,
revert to the factory-default configuration. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration
for the EX Series Switch.

To connect and configure the switch from the console by using the CLI:

1. Connect the console port to a laptop or PC by using the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter. An
Ethernet cable that has an RJ-45 connector at either end and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter.
If your laptop doesn't have a serial port, use a serial to USB adapter.

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or
if you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:
• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

For the location of the console port on different EX Series switches:

• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview.

• See EX2300 Switches Hardware Overview.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch.

• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch.

• See "Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch" on page 14.

• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch.

• See EX4300 Switches Hardware Overview

• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch.

• See EX4550 Switches Hardware Overview

154

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch.

• See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch.

• See Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch.

NOTE: In EX2200-C, EX2300, EX3400, EX4300, and EX4550 switches, you can also use the
Mini-USB Type-B console port to connect to a laptop or PC. See Connect an EX Series
Switch to a Management Console Using the Mini-USB Type-B Console Port.

2. At the Junos OS shell prompt root%, type ezsetup.

3. Enter the hostname. This is optional.
4. Enter the root password you want to use for the device. Reenter the root password when
prompted.
5. Enable services such as SSH and Telnet.

NOTE: You will not be able to log in to the switch as the root user through Telnet. Root login
is allowed only through SSH.

• The default option for SSH is yes. Select this to enable SSH.

• The default option for Telnet is no. Change this to yes to enable Telnet.
6. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:

NOTE: On EX2300 and EX3400 switches, you cannot create a new VLAN for management.
On EX4500, EX6200, and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option is
available.

• Configure in-band management. In in-band management, you configure a network interface or

an uplink module (expansion module) interface as the management interface and connect it to
the management device.
In this scenario, you have the following two options:

• Use the automatically created VLAN default for management—Select this option to configure
all data interfaces as members of the default VLAN. Specify the management IP address and
the default gateway.

• Create a new VLAN for management—Select this option to create a management VLAN.
Specify the VLAN name, VLAN ID, management IP address, and default gateway. Select the
ports that must be part of this VLAN.
155

• Configure out-of-band management—Configure the management port. In out-of-band

management, you use a dedicated management channel (MGMT port) to connect to the
management device. Specify the IP address and gateway of the management interface. Use this
IP address to connect to the switch.
7. Specify the SNMP read community, location, and contact to configure SNMP parameters. These
parameters are optional.
8. Specify the system date and time. Select the time zone from the list. These options are optional.
9. The configured parameters are displayed. Enter yes to commit the configuration. The configuration
is committed as the active configuration for the switch.
10. (For EX4500 switches only) Enter the operational mode command request chassis pic-mode
intraconnect to set the PIC mode to intraconnect.

You can now log in with the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch. If you use the
J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is redirected to the new
management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the J-Web interface displays instructions for
starting a J-Web session.

SEE ALSO

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)

Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX2300 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX3200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX3300 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX3400 Switch | 93
Installing and Connecting an EX4200 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX4300 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX4550 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX4500 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX6210 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch
Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch
156

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)

There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch: one method is through the console by
using the CLI and the other is by using the J-Web interface.

Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, J-Web supports EX4650 switches.

NOTE: You cannot connect to and perform initial configuration of EX2200-24T-4G-DC,

EX4300-48MP, EX4300-48MP-S switches, and EX4600 switches using EZSetup procedure from
the J-Web interface. For EX2200-24T-4G-DC switches, you must use EZSetup from the switch
console. For EX4300-48MP, EX4300-48MP-S, and EX4600 switches, you must use the CLI
procedure through the switch console.

This topic describes the J-Web procedure.

NOTE: Before you begin the configuration, enable a DHCP client on the management PC that
you will connect to the switch so that the PC can obtain an IP address dynamically.

NOTE: Read the following steps before you begin the configuration. You must complete the
initial configuration by using EZSetup within 10 minutes. The switch exits EZSetup after 10
minutes and reverts to the factory default configuration, and the PC loses connectivity to the
switch.

• EX2200 and EX2200-C switch—The LEDs on the network ports on the front panel blink when
the switch is in the initial setup mode.

• EX3200, EX3300, EX4200, EX4300 switches except EX4300-48MP and EX4300-48MP-S

switches, EX4500, EX4550, EX6200, or EX8200 switch—The LCD panel displays a count-
down timer when the switch is in initial setup mode.

NOTE: There is no LCD panel on EX4300-48MP and EX4300-48MP-S switches.

To connect and configure the switch by using the J-Web interface:

1. Transition the switch into initial setup mode:

• EX2200 and EX2200-C switch—Press the mode button located on the lower right corner of the
front panel for 10 seconds.
157

• EX3200, EX3300, EX4200, EX4300 switches except EX4300-48MP and EX4300-48MP-S

switches, EX4500, EX4550, EX6200, or EX8200 switch—Use the Menu and Enter buttons
located to the right of the LCD panel (see Figure 49 on page 157 or Figure 50 on page 157):

Figure 49: LCD Panel in an EX3200, EX4200, EX4500, EX4550, or EX8200 Switch

Figure 50: LCD Panel in an EX4300 Switches Except EX4300-48MP and EX4300-48MP-S
Switches

1— LCD panel 3— LCD panel Menu button

2— LCD panel Enter button 4— Chassis status LEDs

a. Press the Menu button until you see MAINTENANCE MENU. Then press the Enter button.

b. Press Menu until you see ENTER EZSetup. Then press Enter.

If EZSetup does not appear as an option in the menu, select Factory Default to return the
switch to the factory default configuration. EZSetup is displayed in the menu of standalone
switches only when a switch is set to the factory default configuration.

c. Press Enter to confirm setup and continue with EZSetup.

2. Connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the switch.

• EX2200, EX3200, or EX4200 switch—Connect the cable to port 0 (ge-0/0/0) on the front panel
of the switch.

• EX3300 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the rear panel of the switch.
158

• EX4300 switches except EX4300-48MP and EX4300-48MP-S switches—Connect the cable to

the port labeled MGMT on the rear panel of the switch.

• EX4500 or EX4550 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the front panel
(LCD panel side) of the switch.

• EX4650 switches—Connect the cable to the port labeled CON on the rear panel of the switch.

• EX6200 switch—Connect the cable to one of the ports labeled MGMT on the Switch Fabric and
Routing Engine (SRE) module in slot 4 or 5 in an EX6210 switch.

• EX8200 switch—Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the Switch Fabric and Routing
Engine (SRE) module in slot SRE0 in an EX8208 switch or on the Routing Engine (RE) module in
slot RE0 in an EX8216 switch.

These ports are configured as the DHCP server with the default IP address, 192.168.1.1. The
switch can assign an IP address to the management PC in the IP address range 192.168.1.2 through
192.168.1.253.
3. From the PC, open a Web browser, type http://192.168.1.1 in the address field, and press Enter.
4. On the J-Web login page, type root as the username, leave the password field blank, and click
Login.
5. On the Introduction page, click Next.
6. On the Basic Settings page, modify the hostname, the root password, and date and time settings:

• Enter the hostname. This is optional.

• Enter a password and reenter the password.

• Specify the time zone.

• Synchronize the date and time settings of the switch with the management PC or set them
manually by selecting the appropriate option button. This is optional.

Click Next.
7. Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario:

NOTE: On EX2300 and EX3400 switches, you cannot create a new VLAN for management.
On EX4500, EX6210, and EX8200 switches, only the out-of-band management option is
available.

• Configure in-band management. In in-band management, you configure a network interface or

an uplink module (expansion module) interface as the management interface and connect it to
the management device.
In this scenario, you have the following two options:
159

• Configure out-of-band management—Configure the management port. In out-of-band

management, you use a dedicated management channel (MGMT port) to connect to the
management device. Specify the IP address and gateway of the management interface. Use this
IP address to connect to the switch.
8. Click Next.
9. On the Manage Access page, you can select options to enable Telnet, SSH, and SNMP services. For
SNMP, you can configure the read community, location, and contact.
10. Click Next. The Summary screen displays the configured settings.
11. Click Finish. The configuration is committed as the active switch configuration.

NOTE: After the configuration is committed, the connectivity between the PC and the
switch might be lost. To renew the connection, release and renew the IP address by
executing the appropriate commands on the management PC or by removing and
reinserting the Ethernet cable.

12. (For EX4500 switches only) In the CLI, enter the request chassis pic-mode intraconnect operational
mode command to set the PIC mode to intraconnect.

You can now log in by using the CLI or the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch.

If you use the J-Web interface to continue configuring the switch, the Web session is redirected to the
new management IP address. If the connection cannot be made, the J-Web interface displays
instructions for starting a J-Web session.

Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch

IN THIS SECTION

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the request system zeroize
Command | 161
160

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the load factory-default
Command | 161

Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the EX Series Switch LCD Panel | 162

Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the Factory Reset/Mode button on EX2300,
EX3400, and EX4300-48MP Switches | 163

With EX Series switches, if for any reason the current active configuration fails, you can revert to the
factory-default configuration.

You can also roll back to a previous configuration, as described in Rolling Back Junos OS Configuration
Changes, or revert to the rescue configuration, as described in Reverting to the Rescue Configuration for
the EX Series Switch.

TIP: If you have lost the root password, it is not necessary to revert to the factory-default
configuration to reset it. See Recovering the Root Password on Switches.

The factory-default configuration contains the basic configuration settings for the switch. This is the first
configuration of the switch and it is loaded when the switch is first powered on. For the factory-default
configuration file for your switch, see the hardware documentation for your switch.

TIP: You can run the EZsetup script to complete the initial configuration of the switch after
reverting to the factory-default configuration. (The EZsetup script is available only on fixed
configuration switches, it is not available on modular switches.) For information on completing
the initial configuration using either the CLI or the J-Web interface, see Connecting and
Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure) or Connecting and Configuring an EX Series
Switch (J-Web Procedure).

You can revert to the factory-default configuration by using the Menu button to the right of the LCD
panel on switches with LCD panel or by using the request system zeroize operational command or the load
factory-default configuration command. (If your switch model does not have an LCD panel, use these
commands.) You can also use the load factory-default command to revert to the factory-default
configuration file that contains all default settings except the root password setting, which is retained.

These procedures are described in the following sections:

161

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the request

system zeroize Command

The request system zeroize command is a standard Junos OS operational mode command that removes all
configuration information and resets all key values. The operation unlinks all user-created data files,
including customized configuration and log files, from their directories. The switch then reboots and
reverts to the factory-default configuration.

To completely erase user-created data so that it is unrecoverable, use the request system zeroize media
command.

CAUTION: Before issuing request system zeroize, use the request system snapshot command
to back up the files currently used to run the switch to a secondary device. Using the
zeroize command will destroy Junos and OAM partitions and the switch may not boot.
To recover from a failed software installation, see Recovering from a Failed Software
Installation.

To revert to the factory-default configuration by using the request system zeroize command:

user@switch> request system zeroizewarning: System will be rebooted and may not boot without
configurationErase all data, including configuration and log files? [yes,no]
(yes)

2. Type yes to remove configuration and log files and revert to the factory-default configuration.

NOTE: The auto-image-upgrade statement is added under the [edit chassis] hierarchy level when
you use this procedure, and thus the automatic image upgrade feature is made available on
the switch.

Reverting to the EX Series Switch Factory-Default Configuration Using the load

factory-default Command

The load factory-default command is a standard Junos OS configuration command that replaces the
current active configuration with the factory-default configuration (except the root password setting,
which by default is not set but which you must set in order to commit the new configuration in this
procedure).

If you want to run the EZsetup script to complete the initial configuration of the switch after you revert
to the factory-default configuration, do not use the load factory-default command. Instead do the
reversion using either the LCD panel or the request system zeroize command. If you use the load factory-
162

default command to revert to the factory-default configuration, the configuration for the root password
is retained and the EZsetup script will not run. (The EZsetup script is available only on fixed
configuration switches, it is not available on modular switches.)

NOTE: The load factory-default command by itself is not supported on EX3300, EX4200, EX4500,
and EX4550 switches configured in a Virtual Chassis.

To revert to the factory-default configuration by using the load factory-default command:

NOTE: If you use this procedure, you must delete the system commit factory settings, set the
root password, and commit the configuration. These steps are not required when you revert to
the factory-default configuration by using request system zeroize. Also, the auto-image-upgrade
statement is not added to the configuration when you use this procedure; it is added to the
configuration when you use request system zeroize.

1. [edit] user@switch# load factory-default

2. [edit] user@switch# delete system commit factory-settings
3. [edit] user@switch# set system root-authentication plain-text-password
4. [edit] user@switch# commit
5. Check the member ID and primary-role priority with the show virtual-chassis command and check to
see whether there are remaining settings for uplink VCPs by using the show virtual-chassis vc-port
command.

Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the EX Series Switch LCD Panel
To set the switch to the factory-default configuration, for EX Series switches, you can use the LCD panel
and buttons on the front panel of the switch. If the EX Series switch model does not have an LCD panel,
use one of the procedures described in the following sections.

Figure 51: EX Series Switch LCD Panel

163

NOTE: To revert a member switch of a Virtual Chassis to the factory-default configuration, first
disconnect the cables connected to the Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) to avoid affecting Virtual
Chassis configuration parameters (member ID, primary-role priority, and setting of VCP uplinks)
on other members. See Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable, Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable
from an EX4200 Switch, or Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4500 Switch.

To revert to the factory-default configuration by using the LCD panel:

1. Press the Menu button until you see MAINTENANCE MENU on the panel.
2. Press the Enter button.
3. Press Menu until you see FACTORY DEFAULT.
4. Press Enter. The display says RESTORE DEFAULT?
5. Press Enter. The screen flashes FACTORY DEFAULT IN PROGRESS and returns to the idle menu.
6. Complete the initial configuration of the switch. See Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch
(CLI Procedure) or Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure).

Reverting to the Factory-Default Configuration Using the Factory Reset/Mode button

on EX2300, EX3400, and EX4300-48MP Switches
To set the EX2300 switches except the EX2300-24MP and EX2300-48MP switches, EX2300-C
switches, EX3400 switches, and EX4300-48MP switches to the factory-default configuration, use the
Factory Reset/Mode button located on the far right side of the front panel.

NOTE: To revert a member switch of a Virtual Chassis to the factory-default configuration,

disconnect the cables connected to the VCPs to avoid affecting Virtual Chassis configuration
parameters (member ID, primary-role priority, and setting of VCP uplinks) on other members (see
Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable).

To revert to the factory-default configuration by using the Factory Reset/Mode button:

1. Press the Factory Reset/Mode button for 10 seconds. The switch transitions into factory-default
configuration, the console displays committing factory default configuration, and the Link/Activity
LED on the RJ-45 network ports and the uplink ports is lit steadily in green color.
2. Press the Factory Reset/Mode button for 10 more seconds. The switch transitions into initial setup
mode, the console displays committing ezsetup config, and the Link/Activity LED on the RJ-45
network ports and the uplink ports blink in green color.

The Factory Reset/Mode button is enabled by default. You can disable the button using the CLI.

To disable the Factory Reset/Mode button, run the commands:

164

1. [edit]
user@switch# set chassis config-button no-clear

2. [edit]
user@switch# commit

To enable the Factory Reset/Mode button, run the commands:

1. [edit]
user@switch# delete chassis config-button no-clear

2. [edit]
user@switch# commit

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)

Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)
Understanding Configuration Files

Change History Table

Feature support is determined by the platform and release you are using. Use Feature Explorer to
determine if a feature is supported on your platform.

Release Description

19.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, J-Web supports EX4650 switches.

Dashboard for EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Graphical Chassis Viewer | 166

System Information Panel | 168

Health Status Panel | 172

Capacity Utilization Panel | 176

165

Alarms Panel | 177

File System Usage | 177

Chassis Viewer | 178

NOTE: This topic applies only to the J-Web Application package.

When you log in to the J-Web user interface, the dashboard for the Juniper Networks EX Series
Ethernet Switches appears. Use the dashboard to view system information.

The Update Available window appears if there is a latest update of the J-Web Application package
available on the Juniper Networks server. This window is enabled by the auto update feature of J-Web.

NOTE:

• The Update Available window will not appear when you log in, if you have not selected the
Check for updates automatically on every login in the Update Preference section in the
Maintain > Update J-Web side pane. By default, the Check for update automatically on every
login is selected.

• If you choose Update Later, you can update to the latest J-Web Application package by
clicking the orange icon next to Update Available on the top pane of the J-Web interface or
through Maintain > Update J-Web.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 22.3R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.3A1, J-Web supports EX4400 switches.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 22.4R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.4A1, J-Web supports EX4100 and EX4100-F switches.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 23.1R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.1A1, J-Web supports EX4400-24X switches.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 23.2R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.2A1, J-Web supports EX4400-EM-1C uplink module for EX4400 and EX4400-24X
switches.

The dashboard comprises a graphical chassis viewer and four panels.

166

Graphical Chassis Viewer

The Dashboard panel displays a graphical view of the chassis of a switch. In a Virtual Chassis, it displays
a graphical view of each member switch.

In a Virtual Chassis, the default values are shown on the Dashboard panel when no chassis image is
clicked. The panel displays the value for a switch if you click its image.

NOTE:

• If the member switch is not present, inactive, or not provisioned, you cannot expand the
member switch image.

• Starting in J-Web Application Package Release 19.2A1, J-Web supports EX4650 switches.

NOTE: For EX4650 switches, chassis viewer supports only the standalone view and
does not support the Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 22.3R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.3A1, J-Web supports EX4400 switches. For EX4400 switches, chassis viewer supports
both the standalone view and Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 22.4R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.4A1, J-Web supports EX4100 and EX4100-F switches. For EX4100 and EX4100-F
switches, chassis viewer supports both the standalone view and Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 23.1R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.1A1, J-Web supports EX4400-24X switches. For EX4400-24X switches, chassis viewer
supports both the standalone view and Virtual Chassis configuration.

• Starting in Junos OS Release 23.2R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.2A1, J-Web supports EX4400-EM-1C uplink module for EX4400 and EX4400-24X
switches.

Table 39 on page 167 lists the details that are displayed on each member switch.
167

Table 39: Details of a Virtual Chassis Member Switch

Details Example

Model number of the member switch EX3300

Assigned ID that applies to the entire Virtual ID 2

Chassis configuration
NOTE: If the member switch is not provisioned, the serial
number of the switch is displayed instead of its ID.

Role of the member switch Master

Possible roles are: Master, Backup, or Linecard

Status of the member switch Prsnt

Possible statuses are: Prsnt, NotPrsnt, Inactive, or Unprvsnd

The status of the member switch is displayed on the image of the switch. If the member switch appears
dimmed, it means the switch is not present, is inactive, or is not provisioned in the Virtual Chassis. If the
member switch does not appear dimmed, it means the switch is present and is active.

Table 40 on page 167 describes the possible status of a member switch.

Table 40: Status of a Member Switch in a Virtual Chassis

If the member switch is It appears as It means the member switch

Present Prsnt Has established physical and logical connections with Virtual Chassis
member switches.

Not present dimmed and Has been disconnected from the existing Virtual Chassis.

NotPrsnt

Inactive dimmed and Has established physical connections, but is unable to establish logical
connections.
Inactive
168

Table 40: Status of a Member Switch in a Virtual Chassis (Continued)

If the member switch is It appears as It means the member switch

Not provisioned dimmed and Cannot synchronize with the existing preprovisioned Virtual Chassis.

Unprvsnd

Click Rear View for a graphical view of the rear panel of the switch.

Click Preferences to choose which panels must be displayed and set the refresh interval for chassis
viewer information. Click OK to save your changes and return to the dashboard or click Cancel to return
to the dashboard without saving changes.

NOTE: You can drag the various panels to different locations in the J-Web window.

System Information Panel

Table 41: System Information

Field Description

System name Indicates the local name of the EX Series switch. The
local name of the EX Series switches changes when an
individual image is clicked.

For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F

switches:

• Indicates the switch's host name.

• Displays the switch's specific host name when you

click on the individual line card.
169

Table 41: System Information (Continued)

Field Description

Device model Indicates the model of the EX Series switch. In a Virtual

Chassis configuration, to indicate the model of a
switch, click the image of that switch.

NOTE: In a Virtual Chassis setup for an EX6210,

EX8208, or EX8216 switch, the Device model field
displays details of the primary Routing Engine. To view
details of a member, select it.

By default, the EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and

EX4100-F switches show the model of the primary
switch. When you click on the image, the model of the
switch is displayed.
170

Table 41: System Information (Continued)

Field Description

Inventory details Indicates the following:

• For EX3200, EX2200, EX2200-C, EX3300, EX4200,

EX4300-48MP, EX4500, and EX4550 switches that
are not configured as Virtual Chassis, the value
displayed in Inventory details field is always 1 FPC.
FPC is a legacy term for a slot in a large Juniper
Networks chassis; which simply refers to the
standalone switch.

• For EX2200 and EX2200-C switches configured as

a Virtual Chassis, the value displayed in the
Inventory details field is 1–4 FPC, with the number
corresponding to the number of member switches.

• For EX3300 switches configured as a Virtual

Chassis, the value displayed in the Inventory details
field is 1–6 FPC, with the number corresponding to
the number of member switches.

NOTE: For Junos OS Release 14.1X53-D10 and

later, EX3300 switches configured as a Virtual
Chassis display the value 1–10 FPC in the
Inventory details field.

• For EX4200, EX4500, and EX4550 switches

configured as a Virtual Chassis, the value displayed
in the Inventory details field is 1–10 FPC, with the
number corresponding to the number of member
switches.

• For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F

switches, the value displayed in Inventory details
field is equal to the number of FPCs.

• For EX6210 switches, the values displayed in the

Inventory details field are 1–2 CB and 1–9 FPC. CB,
or Control Board, refers to the SRE module. FPC
refers to line cards and the FPC within the CB.
171

Table 41: System Information (Continued)

Field Description

• For an EX8208 switch, the values displayed in

Inventory details field are 1–3 CB and 0–8 FPC. CB,
or Control Board, refers to SRE and SF modules.
FPC refers to line cards.

• For EX8216 switches, the values displayed in

Inventory details field are 1–2 CB and 0–16 FPC.
CB, or Control Board, refers to RE modules and
FPC refers to line cards.

• For an XRE200 External Routing Engine in an

EX8200 Virtual Chassis, the value displayed in
Inventory details is 1 XRE. XRE refers to RE
modules. For XRE200 External Routing Engines
configured as a Virtual Chassis, the values displayed
in Inventory details are 1–2 XRE and 0–4 LCC,
where LCC refers to the EX8200 line card chassis.

Junos image Indicates the version of the Junos OS image. In a

Virtual Chassis configuration, the Junos OS image of
the primary switch is displayed by default. To display
the Junos OS image of a specific switch, click the
image of that switch.

NOTE: For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F

switches, the Junos OS image of the primary switch is
displayed by default. To display the Junos OS image of
a specific switch, click the image of that switch.

Boot image Indicates the version of the boot image that is used. In
a Virtual Chassis configuration, the boot image of the
primary switch is displayed by default. To display the
boot image of a specific switch, click the image of that
switch.

NOTE: For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F

switches, the boot image of the primary switch is
displayed by default. To display the boot image of a
specific switch, click the image of that switch.
172

Table 41: System Information (Continued)

Field Description

Device uptime Indicates the time since the last reboot. In a Virtual
Chassis configuration, to display the uptime of the
specific switch, click the image of that switch.

NOTE: For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F

switches, click the image of the switch to display the
uptime.

Last configured time Indicates the time when the switch was last
configured.

For EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F switches in

Virtual Chassis configuration, indicates the last
configured time of the primary by default. To display
the last configured time of a specific switch, click the
image of that switch.

Health Status Panel

Table 42: Health Status

Field Description

EX2200, EX2200-C, EX3200, EX3300, EX4200, and EX4300-48MP Switches

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the Routing Engine. In a Virtual Chassis configuration, the memory
utilization value of the primary Routing Engine is displayed.

NOTE: In EX4300-48MP switches, you can use only the built-in QSFP+ ports as VCPs to connect
the switch in a Virtual Chassis. You cannot connect the ports on the uplink module in
EX4300-48MP switches to Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs).

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.
173

Table 42: Health Status (Continued)

Field Description

Temp. Indicates the chassis temperature status. Temperatures are listed in Celsius and the corresponding
Fahrenheit values.

NOTE: The Temp field is unavailable for a standalone EX2200-C switch.

The Temp field is dynamically available for an EX2200 Virtual Chassis switch based on the model
of the member clicked.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes. In a Virtual Chassis configuration, on loading
the primary or backup switch, the CPU load for that switch's Routing Engine is displayed by
default. To display the CPU load for a specific switch's Routing Engine, click the image of that
switch.

Fan status Indicates the status of the fans in the fan tray. The possible values are OK, Failed, and Absent. In a
Virtual Chassis configuration, the fan status of the primary switch is displayed by default. To
display the fan status for any switch , click the image of that switch.

NOTE: The Fan status field is unavailable for a standalone EX2200-C switch.
The Fan status field is dynamically available for an EX2200 Virtual Chassis switch based on the
model of the member clicked.

EX4500 and EX4550 Switches

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the Routing Engine. In a Virtual Chassis configuration, the memory
utilization value of the primary Routing Engine is displayed.

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.

Temp. Indicates the chassis temperature status. Temperatures in the dashboard are listed in Celsius and
the corresponding Fahrenheit values.

NOTE: The Temp field is unavailable for an EX4500 switch.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

Fan status Indicates the status of the fans in the fan tray. The possible values are OK, Failed, and Absent.
This field also indicates the direction of airflow of the fan tray. The possible values are Front to
back and Back to front.
174

Table 42: Health Status (Continued)

Field Description

EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F Switches

Fan status Indicates the status of the fans in the fan tray. The possible values are OK, Failed, and Absent.

NOTE: The fans are located on the side panel of the chassis.

For EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F switches in Virtual Chassis, displays the primary member’s
fan status.

NOTE: EX4100-F-12T and EX4100-F-12P are fanless switches that have natural convection
cooling.

Temp. Indicates temperature of the sensor near to Routing Engine.

In EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F Virtual Chassis, the primary FPCs Routing Engine
temperature is displayed by default. To display the temperature of the FPC Routing Engine of the
specific switch, click the image of that switch.

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the Routing Engine.

To display the Routing Engine memory utilization of the EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F
switches, click primary or line card for primary or click backup for backup.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

In EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F Virtual Chassis, the primary Routing Engine CPU load is
displayed by default. To display the chassis Routing Engine CPU load of the specific switch, click
the image of that switch.

EX6210 Switches

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the primary Routing Engine. Click the backup Routing Engine to
view the memory used in the backup Routing Engine.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.
175

Table 42: Health Status (Continued)

Field Description

Fan status Indicates the status of the fans in the fan tray. The possible values are OK, Failed, and Absent.

EX8208 Switches

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the external Routing Engine. In an EX8200 Virtual Chassis, the
memory utilization value of the XRE200 External Routing Engine in the primary role is displayed.
Click the XRE200 External Routing Engine in the backup role to view the memory used in the
backup external Routing Engine.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.

EX8216 Switches

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.

XRE200 External Routing Engines

Memory util. Indicates the memory used in the external Routing Engine. In an EX8200 Virtual Chassis, the
memory utilization value of the XRE200 External Routing Engine in the primary role is displayed.
Click the backup XRE200 External Routing Engine to view the memory used in backup external
Routing Engine.

CPU load Indicates the average CPU usage over 15 minutes.

Flash Indicates the usage and capacity of internal flash memory and any external USB flash drive.
176

Table 42: Health Status (Continued)

Field Description

Fan Status Indicates the status of the fans in the fan tray. The possible values are OK, Failed, and Absent.

Capacity Utilization Panel

Table 43: Capacity Utilization

Field Description

Number of active ports Indicates the number of active ports in the switch.
Configured Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) are considered
as active ports.

Total number of ports Indicates the number of ports in the switch.

In EX3300 Virtual Chassis, the total number of ports of

all of the switches is displayed.

For EX4650 switches, on loading the switch, the

consolidated values for all the FPCs are displayed by
default.

For EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F switches, on

loading the switch, the consolidated values for all the
FPCs are displayed by default and dedicated VCP ports
are not considered.

Used-up MAC-Table entries Indicates the number of MAC table entries.

177

Table 43: Capacity Utilization (Continued)

Field Description

Supported MAC-Table entries Indicates the maximum number of MAC table entries
permitted.

For EX4650 switches, the supported maximum number

of MAC table entries are 288000.

For EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F switches, the

supported maximum number of MAC table entries are
64000.

Number of VLANs configured Indicates the number of VLANs configured.

NOTE: Only tagged VLANs are counted.

Number of VLANs supported Indicates the maximum number of VLANs supported.

For EX switches, the supported maximum number of

VLANs are 4094.

Alarms Panel

Displays information about the last five alarms raised in the system. For example, if there are 5 major
alarms, then details of all 5 major alarms are displayed. If there are 4 major alarms and 3 minor alarms,
then details of the 4 major alarms and 1 minor alarm are displayed. Major alarms are displayed in red and
minor alarms are displayed in yellow.

In an EX8200 Virtual Chassis, the top 5 alarms for the primary external Routing Engine are displayed by
default. If you select an EX8200 member switch of the Virtual Chassis, the top 5 alarms for that member
switch are displayed.

File System Usage

To display the file system storage details of a switch in the backup or line card role, click the image of
that switch.
178

For EX4650, EX4400, EX4100, and EX4100-F switches, the directory, space used, and the file type
details are displayed. By default, primary switch file system storage details are displayed. When you click
the image, line card switch file system storage details are displayed.

Chassis Viewer

Click the Rear View button to see the back of the chassis image. Click the Front View button to see the
front of the chassis image. In a Virtual Chassis configuration, the Rear View button is disabled if the
switch is not selected.

NOTE: For EX4650 switches, chassis viewer supports only the standalone view and does not
support Virtual Chassis configuration.
Starting in Junos OS Release 22.3R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.3A1, J-Web supports EX4400 switches.

Starting in Junos OS Release 22.4R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
22.4A1, J-Web supports EX4100 and EX4100-F switches.

Starting in Junos OS Release 23.1R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.1A1, J-Web supports EX4400-24X switches.

Starting in Junos OS Release 23.2R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release
23.2A1, J-Web supports EX4400-EM-1C uplink module for EX4400 and EX4400-24X switches.

• Table 44 on page 179—Describes the chassis viewer for EX2200 switches.

• Table 45 on page 180—Describes the chassis viewer for EX2200-C switches.

• Table 46 on page 180—Describes the chassis viewer for EX3200, EX3300, and EX4200 switches.

• Table 47 on page 183—Describes the chassis viewer for EX4100 and EX4100-F switches.

• Table 48 on page 185—Describes the chassis viewer for EX4400 switches.

• Table 49 on page 188—Describes the chassis viewer for EX4500 switches.

• Table 50 on page 190—Describes the chassis viewer for EX4550 switches.

• Table 51 on page 192—Describes the chassis viewer for EX4650 switches.

• Table 52 on page 193—Describes the chassis viewer for EX6210 switches.

• Table 53 on page 195—Describes the chassis viewer for EX8208 switches.

179

• Table 54 on page 196—Describes the chassis viewer for EX8216 switches.

• Table 55 on page 198—Describes the chassis viewer for the XRE200 External Routing Engines.

Table 44: Chassis Viewer for EX2200 Switches

Field Description

Front View

Interface status In the image, the following colors denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

Rear View

Management (me0) port The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-
of-band management.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper
Networks for your EX Series switch.

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display name, status, and description information.

Power supply Mouse over the power outlet icon to display name, status, and description
information.
180

Table 45: Chassis Viewer for EX2200-C Switches

Field Description

Front View

Interface status In the image, the following colors denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-
port of-band management.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper
Networks for your EX Series switch.

Rear View

Power supply Mouse over the power outlet icon to display name, status, and description
information.

Table 46: Chassis Viewer for EX3200, EX3300, and EX4200 Switches

Field Description

Front View
181

Table 46: Chassis Viewer for EX3200, EX3300, and EX4200 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Interface status In the image, the following colors denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

For a Virtual Chassis configuration, select the switch to view the interface status.

If an SFP+ uplink module is installed in the switch, mouse over the port icon to display
whether the module is configured to operate in 1-gigabit mode or in 10-gigabit mode. If
the module is configured to operate in 1-gigabit mode, the tool tip information is
displayed for all 4 ports. If the module is configured to operate in 10-gigabit mode, the
tool tip information is displayed only for 2 ports.

On an EX3300 switch with the 4x GE/XE SFP+ module, mouse over the port icon to
display whether the module is configured to operate in 1-gigabit mode or 10-gigabit
mode.

For SFP, SFP+, and XFP ports, the interfaces appear dimmed if no transceiver is
inserted. The chassis viewer displays Transceiver not plugged-in when you mouse over
the port icon.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the
current character display.

Rear View of the EX3200 Switch

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-
port of-band management.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)
182

Table 46: Chassis Viewer for EX3200, EX3300, and EX4200 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display name, status, and description information.

Power supply Mouse over the power supply icon to display name, status, and description information.

Rear View of the EX3300 and EX4200 Switch

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display name, status, and description information. For a
Virtual Chassis, the status of the fans of the selected member switch is displayed.

Virtual Chassis port Displayed only when EX4200 switches are configured as a Virtual Chassis. The
following colors denote the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status:

• Green—VCP is up and operational.

• Yellow—VCP is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—VCP is down and nonoperational.

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-
port of-band management.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description
information.
183

Table 47: Chassis Viewer for EX4100 and EX4100-F Switches

Field Description

Front View

RJ-45 ports Mouse over the interface (port) to view more

information.

EX4100 Switches:

• EX4100-24P switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE+.

• EX4100-24T switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

• EX4100-48P switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE+.

• EX4100-48T switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

EX4100-F Switches:

• EX4100-F-12T switch supports 12 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

• EX4100-F-12P switch supports 12 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support support PoE+.

• EX4100-F-24P switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE+.

• EX4100-F-24T switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

• EX4100-F-48P switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE+.

• EX4100-F-48T switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

SFP ports Mouse over the interface (10 GE SFP+ Uplink ports) to
view more information.
184

Table 47: Chassis Viewer for EX4100 and EX4100-F Switches (Continued)

Field Description

USB port Displays USB Type C console port.

Chassis status LEDs Displays status LEDs labeled SYS, ALM, MST, and CLD.

Port mode LEDs Displays port mode LEDs labeled SPD, DX, EN, and
PoE.

Factory Reset/Mode button Displays the Factory Reset/Mode button, which is used
to reset the switches to the factory-default
configuration.

Virtual Chassis ports EX4100 and EX4100-F switches have dedicated

Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs) that you can use to
interconnect member switches of a Virtual Chassis.
You can interconnect a maximum of 10 switches to
form a Virtual Chassis.

Rear View

Management port The management port (MGMT) is used to connect the

switch to a management device for out-of-band
management.

Console port The Console port (RJ-45) labeled as CON is used to

connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server.

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives

purchased from Juniper Networks for your EX Series
switch.
185

Table 47: Chassis Viewer for EX4100 and EX4100-F Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Power supply Mouse over the power supply icon to display name,
status, and description information.

NOTE: EX4100-F-12T and EX4100-F-12P switches

use external power adapters.

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display fan's status
information.

NOTE: EX4100-F-12T and EX4100-F-12P are fanless

switches that have natural convection cooling.

Table 48: Chassis Viewer for EX4400 Switches

Field Description

Front View
186

Table 48: Chassis Viewer for EX4400 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

RJ-45 ports Mouse over the interface (port) to view more

information.

• EX4400-24T switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

• EX4400-24P switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE-bt.

• EX4400-24MP switch supports 24 RJ-45 ports

(100-Mbps/1-Gbps/2.5-Gbps/5-Gbps/10- Gbps)
that support PoE-bt.

• EX4400-48T switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T).

• EX4400-48P switch supports 48 RJ-45 ports

(10/100/1000BASE-T) that support PoE-bt.

• EX4400-48MP switch supports 36 RJ-45 ports

(100-Mbps/1-Gbps/2.5-Gbps) and 12 RJ-45 ports
(100-Mbps/1-Gbps/2.5-Gbps/5-Gbps/10- Gbps)
that support PoE-bt.

SFP ports Mouse over the interface (port) to view more

information.

EX4400-48F switch supports 36 small form-factor

pluggable (SFP) ports and 12 small form-factor
pluggable plus (SFP+) ports.

EX4400-24X switch supports 24 1GbE/10GbE

SFP/SFP+ ports and two 100GbE QSFP28 ports.

USB port Displays USB Type C console port.

Chassis status LEDs Displays status LEDs labeled SYS, ALM, MST, and CLD.

Port mode LEDs Displays port mode LEDs labeled SPD, DX, and EN.
187

Table 48: Chassis Viewer for EX4400 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Factory Reset/Mode button Displays the Factory Reset/Mode button, which is used
to reset the switches to the factory-default
configuration.

Extension module slot Displays a slot for installing an optional extension

module. Extension modules are hot-insertable and hot-
removable field replaceable units (FRUs).

The 1x100GbE QSFP28 extension module (EX4400-

EM-1C) supports Media Access Control Security
(MACsec) with AES-256 encryption. You can install
one 40GbE QSFP+ transceiver or one 100GbE
QSFP28 transceiver in the extension module.

Rear View

Management port The management port (me0) is used to connect the

switch to a management device for out-of-band
management.

NOTE: For EX4400-24X, the MGMT port is available

on the front panel.

Virtual Chassis ports The QSFP28 ports are configured as Virtual Chassis
ports (VCPs) by default. You can configure them as
network ports and operate them as 100 GbE network
ports by using QSFP28 transceivers.

Console port The Console port (RJ-45) labeled as CON is used to

connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server.

NOTE: For EX4400-24X, the CON port is available on

the front panel.
188

Table 48: Chassis Viewer for EX4400 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE:

• We recommend that you use USB flash drives

purchased from Juniper Networks for your EX
Series switch.

• For EX4400-24X, the USB port is available only on

the front panel.

Mini USB port Indicates the mini USB port for the switch.

NOTE: Mini USB port is not available for EX4400-24X.

Power supply Mouse over the power supply icon to display name,
status, and description information.

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display status of the
fans and airflow direction information.

Table 49: Chassis Viewer for EX4500 Switches

Field Description

Front View
189

Table 49: Chassis Viewer for EX4500 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Interface status In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

For a Virtual Chassis configuration, select the switch to view the interface status.

If an SFP+ uplink module is installed in the switch, mouse over the interface (ports) on
the module for more information.

For SFP and SFP+ ports, the interfaces appear dimmed if no transceiver is inserted. The
chassis viewer displays Transceiver not plugged-in when you mouse over the port icon.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the
current character display.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a console
server.

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-of-
port band management. Use this port for initial switch configuration.

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.

Rear View of the EX4500 Switch

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display status of the fans and airflow direction
information. For a Virtual Chassis, the status of the fans of the selected member switch
is displayed.
190

Table 49: Chassis Viewer for EX4500 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Virtual Chassis port Displayed only when switches are configured as a Virtual Chassis. The colors listed
below denote the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status:

• Green—VCP is up and operational.

• Yellow—VCP is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—VCP is down and nonoperational.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description information.

Intraconnect module Mouse over the module to display details of the intraconnect module. The intraconnect
module helps the switch achieve line rate on all its ports.

Virtual Chassis Mouse over to display details of the switches in the Virtual Chassis configuration.
module

Table 50: Chassis Viewer for EX4550 Switches

Field Description

Front View
191

Table 50: Chassis Viewer for EX4550 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Interface status In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

For a Virtual Chassis configuration, select the switch to view the interface status.

If an expansion module or a Virtual Chassis module is installed in the switch, mouse over
the interface (ports) on the module for more information.

On an EX4550-32F switch, for SFP and SFP+ ports, the interfaces appear dimmed if no
transceiver is inserted. The chassis viewer displays Transceiver (1G/10G) not plugged in
when you mouse over the port icon.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the current
character display.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a console
server.

Mini Console port The mini console port is used to connect the switch to the management console.

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-of-
port band management. Use this port for initial switch configuration.

PIC1 slot You can insert an uplink module or a Virtual Chassis module in the PIC1 slot. Mouse over
to display the details of the module inserted (uplink or Virtual Chassis).

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.

Rear View of the EX4550 Switch

192

Table 50: Chassis Viewer for EX4550 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display the status of the fans and airflow direction
information. For a Virtual Chassis, the status of the fans of the selected member switch is
displayed.

Virtual Chassis port Displayed only when switches are configured as a Virtual Chassis. In the image, the colors
listed below denote the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status:

• Green—VCP is up and operational.

• Yellow—VCP is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—VCP is down and nonoperational.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description information.

PIC2 slot You can insert an uplink module or a Virtual Chassis module into the PIC2 slot. Mouse
over to display the details of the module inserted (uplink or Virtual Chassis).

Table 51: Chassis Viewer for EX4650 Switches

Field Description

Front View

SFP28 and QSFP28 Ports Displays 48 small form-factor pluggable (SFP28) ports and eight 100-Gbps quad
small form-factor pluggable (QSFP28) ports.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

Rear View

Management port The management port (em0) is used to connect the switch to a management device
for out-of-band management.

Virtual Chassis ports Not supported.

193

Table 51: Chassis Viewer for EX4650 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Console port The Console port (RJ-45) is used to connect the switch to a management console or
to a console server.

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper
Networks for your EX Series switch.

Fan Tray Mouse over the fan tray icons to display name, status, and description information.

Power supply Mouse over the power supply icon to display name, status, and description
information.

Table 52: Chassis Viewer for EX6210 Switches

Field Description

Front View

Temperature Mouse over the temperature icon to display the temperature of the CB or line card.
194

Table 52: Chassis Viewer for EX6210 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Interface status Select the CB or line card.

In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

You can view status for the following ports on the SRE module:

• USB port—Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks for
your EX Series switch.

• Management (me0) port—The management port is used to connect the switch to a

management device for out-of-band management. There are 2 management ports: fiber
and copper. The same status is displayed for both the me0 ports.

• Console port—The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or
to a console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

CBs support 4 SFP+ uplink ports. Mouse over the interface on the CB for more information.

For SFP and SFP+ ports, the interfaces appear dimmed if no transceiver is inserted. The chassis
viewer displays Transceiver not plugged-in when you mouse over the port icon.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description information.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the current
character display of the primary Routing Engine. The EX6210 switch has 2 LCD panels, one for
each Routing Engine. The backup Routing Engine LCD displays Backup.

Rear View of the EX6210 Switch

Fan tray Mouse over the fan tray icon to display information regarding the cooling fans.
195

Table 53: Chassis Viewer for EX8208 Switches

Field Description

Front View

Interface status In the image, click any line card, SRE module, or SF module to view the front view of the
selected component. In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

You can view status for the following ports on the SRE module:

• USB port—Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks for
your EX Series switch.

• Auxiliary port—This port is unavailable.

• Management (me0) port—The management port is used to connect the switch to a

management device for out-of-band management.

• Console port—The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or
to a console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

Because the SF module has no ports, no status information is displayed.

Slot numbers Slots on the switch are labeled, from the top of the switch down:

• 0–3 (line cards)

• SRE0, SF, SRE1 (SRE and SF modules)

• 4–7 (line cards)

Temperature The active slots contain a gray temperature icon. Mouse over the icon to display temperature
information for the slot.
196

Table 53: Chassis Viewer for EX8208 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Fan status Mouse over the fan tray icon to display name, status, and description information.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description information.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the current
character display.

Rear View The EX8208 switch does not have any components on the rear of the chassis.

Table 54: Chassis Viewer for EX8216 Switches

Field Description

Front View
197

Table 54: Chassis Viewer for EX8216 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

Interface status In the image, click any line card or RE module to display the front view of the selected
component. In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

You can view status for the following ports on the RE module:

• USB port—Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks for
your EX Series switch.

• Auxiliary port—This port is unavailable.

• Management (me0) port—The management port is used to connect the switch to a

management device for out-of-band management.

• Console port—The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or
to a console server. (You might do this for initial switch configuration.)

Slot numbers Slots on the switch are labeled, from the top of the switch down:

• RE0 (RE module)

• RE1 (RE module)

• 0–15 (line cards)

Temperature The active slots contain a gray temperature icon. Mouse over the icon to display temperature
information for the slot.

Fan status Mouse over the fan tray icon to display consolidated information about the fans.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description information.
198

Table 54: Chassis Viewer for EX8216 Switches (Continued)

Field Description

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the current
character display.

Rear View

SF modules Mouse over the SF module icons in their respective slots to display information. Slots are
numbered SF7–SF0, from left to right.

Table 55: Chassis Viewer for XRE200 External Routing Engines

Field Description

Front View

Interface status In the image, the colors listed below denote the interface status:

• Green—Interface is up and operational.

• Yellow—Interface is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—Interface is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

For a Virtual Chassis configuration, select the switch to view the interface status.

Console port The console port is used to connect the switch to a management console or to a
console server.

Management (me0) The management port is used to connect the switch to a management device for out-
port of-band management. Use this port for initial switch configuration.
199

Table 55: Chassis Viewer for XRE200 External Routing Engines (Continued)

Field Description

Virtual Chassis port In the image, the colors listed below denote the Virtual Chassis port (VCP) status:

• Green—VCP is up and operational.

• Yellow—VCP is up but is nonoperational.

• Gray—VCP is down and nonoperational.

Mouse over the interface (port) to view more information.

LCD panel LCD panel configured for the LEDs on the ports. Mouse over the icon to view the
current character display.

Temperature The active slots contain a gray temperature icon. Mouse over the icon to display
temperature information for the slot.

USB port Indicates the USB port for the switch.

NOTE: We recommend that you use USB flash drives purchased from Juniper Networks
for your EX Series switch.

PIC1 slot You can install a Virtual Chassis module in the PIC1 slot. Mouse over the Virtual Chassis
ports to display the port status details.

PIC2 slot You can install a Virtual Chassis module in the PIC2 slot. Mouse over the Virtual Chassis
ports to display the port status details.

Rear View of the XRE200 External Routing Engine

Fan modules Mouse over the fan modules to display status of the fans and airflow direction
information. For a Virtual Chassis, the status of the fans of the selected member switch
is displayed.

Power supplies Mouse over the power supply icons to display name, status, and description
information.

Change History Table

200

Feature support is determined by the platform and release you are using. Use Feature Explorer to
determine if a feature is supported on your platform.

Release Description

22.4A1 Starting in Junos OS Release 22.4R1 which aligns with the J-Web Application package release 22.4A1, J-
Web supports EX4100 and EX4100-F switches.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

J-Web User Interface for EX Series Switches Overview

EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview
EX2300 Switches Hardware Overview
EX3200 Switches Hardware Overview
EX3300 Switches Hardware Overview
EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview
EX4500 Switches Hardware Overview
EX6210 Switch Hardware Overview
EX8208 Switch Hardware Overview
EX8216 Switch Hardware Overview
Check Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface
XRE200 External Routing Engine Hardware Guide
4 CHAPTER

Maintaining Components

Maintaining the EX3400 Switch Cooling System | 202

Maintaining the EX3400 Power System | 205

Maintaining a Transceiver | 211

Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables | 218

202

Maintaining the EX3400 Switch Cooling System

IN THIS SECTION

Removing a Fan Module from an EX3400 Switch | 202

Installing a Fan Module in an EX3400 Switch | 203

Removing a Fan Module from an EX3400 Switch

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• A replacement fan module

Each fan module in EX3400 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU)
installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch
or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: If you remove both the fan modules, you must replace at least one fan module within four
minutes for the switch to operate without disrupting its functions.

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Loosen the captive screws on the front faceplate of the fan module by using your fingers. If you are
unable to loosen the captive screws by using your fingers, use the screwdriver.

WARNING: To prevent injury, do not touch the fan with your hands or any tools as you
slide the fan module out of the chassis—the fan might still be running.

3. Grasp the handle on the fan module and pull it firmly to slide the fan module out of the chassis.
4. Place the fan module in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
5. Install the replacement fan.
203

6. Tighten the captive screws on the faceplate of the fan module by using your fingers. If you are unable
to tighten the captive screws by using your fingers, use the screwdriver.

Figure 52: Removing a Fan Module from an EX3400 Switch

NOTE: Both the fan modules must be installed and operational for optimal functioning of the
switch.

Installing a Fan Module in an EX3400 Switch

Before you install a fan module in the switch:

• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a fan module in the switch chassis:

• ESD grounding strap

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

Each fan module is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU) installed in the rear
panel of the switch: You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch
functions.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

204

• Fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Power supplies with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same
chassis.

1. Ensure that you have the correct fan module. The direction of the airflow in the fan module must
match the direction of the airflow in the installed power supply.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD point on the
chassis.
3. Remove the fan module from its bag.
4. Hold the handle of the fan module with one hand and support the weight of the module with the
other hand. Place the fan module in the fan module slot on the rear panel of the switch and slide it in
until it is fully seated.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the faceplate of the fan module by using your fingers. If you are unable
to tighten the captive screws by using your fingers, use the screwdriver.

Figure 53: Installing a Fan Module in an EX3400 Switch

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or upgrade of
hardware components at https://www.juniper.net/customers/support/tools/updateinstallbase/ .
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note does not
apply if you replace existing components with the same type of component.

SEE ALSO

EX3400 Cooling System | 24

205

Maintaining the EX3400 Power System

IN THIS SECTION

Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch | 205

Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch | 206

Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch | 208

Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch | 210

Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch

Before you remove a power supply from an EX3400 switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary
precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge
Damage).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a power supply from an EX3400
switch:

• ESD grounding strap

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 (not provided)

• Antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Replacement power supply or a cover panel for the power supply slot

The power supplies in EX3400 switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units
(FRUs) installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: If only one power supply is installed in the switch, you must power off the switch before
removing the power supply.
206

CAUTION: We recommend that you install either a replacement power supply or a

cover panel in the empty power supply slot to prevent chassis overheating and dust
accumulation.

To remove an AC power supply from the switch (see Figure 54 on page 206):

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD point on the
chassis.
3. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (O) position.
4. Gently pull out the plug end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet.
5. Remove the power cord from the power supply faceplate by detaching the power cord retainer and
gently pulling out the socket end of the power cord connected to the power supply faceplate.
6. Slide the ejector lever toward the left until the power supply is unseated.
7. Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide the power supply halfway out of the chassis.
8. Place one hand under the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis. Take
care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections.
9. Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
10. If you are not replacing the power supply, install the cover panel over the slot.

Figure 54: Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch

Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch

Before you install an AC power supply in the switch:

• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the power supply:
207

• ESD grounding strap

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

Each AC power supply in EX3400 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit
(FRU) installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace it without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 150 W, 600 W, and 920 W power supplies in the same chassis.

• Power supplies with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same
chassis.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source outlet. The switch is
shipped with one power supply preinstalled. Additional power supplies are separately orderable.
You can install up to two power supplies in the switch. The power supplies provided by default
for each model are documented in EX3400 Switch Models.

To install an AC power supply in the switch (see Figure 55 on page 208):

1. Ensure that you have the correct power supply. The direction of the airflow in the power supply must
match the direction of the airflow in the installed fan module.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD point on the
chassis.
3. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, loosen the captive screws on the cover panel by
using your fingers or the screwdriver. Hold the captive screw and gently pull it outward to remove
the cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
4. Taking care not to touch power supply pins, leads, or solder connections, remove the power supply
from the bag.
5. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel of the switch
and slide it in until it is fully seated and the ejector lever fits into place.
208

Figure 55: Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch

SEE ALSO

AC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 28

Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the power supply from the
switch chassis:

• ESD grounding strap

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 (not provided)

• Slotted (-) screwdriver

• Antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Replacement power supply or a cover panel for the power supply slot
209

The power supplies in EX3400 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units
(FRUs) installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: If only one power supply is installed in the switch, you must power off the switch before
removing the power supply.

CAUTION: We recommend that you install either a replacement power supply or a

cover panel in the empty power supply slot to prevent chassis overheating and dust
accumulation.

To remove a DC power supply from the switch (see Figure 56 on page 209):

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD point on the
chassis.
3. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cables leads is 0 V and that there is no
chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.
4. Remove the two screws that attach the terminal connector to the power supply socket.
5. Remove the terminal connector from the power supply unit.
6. Slide the ejector lever toward the left until the power supply is unseated.
7. Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide the power supply halfway out of the chassis.
8. Taking care not to touch power supply pins, leads, or solder connections, place one hand under the
power supply to support it. Grasp the power supply handle with your other hand and pull the
power supply completely out of the chassis.
9. Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
10. If you are not replacing the power supply, install the cover panel over the slot.

Figure 56: Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX3400 Switch

210

Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch

Before you install an DC power supply in the switch:

• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the power supply:

• ESD grounding strap

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

Each DC power supply in EX3400 switches is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit
(FRU) installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace the power supplies without
powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• Power supplies with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different directions for the airflow in the same
chassis.

NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source. The switch is
shipped with one power supply preinstalled. Additional power supplies are separately orderable.
You can install up to two power supplies in the switch.

To install a DC power supply in the switch (see Figure 57 on page 211):

1. Ensure that the fan modules installed in the switch have the AIR OUT label on them.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD point on the
chassis.
3. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, loosen the captive screws on the cover panel by
using your fingers or the screwdriver. Hold the captive screw and gently pull it outward to remove
the cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
4. Taking care not to touch power supply pins, leads, or solder connections, remove the power supply
from the bag.
211

5. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel of the switch
and slide it in until it is fully seated and the ejector lever fits into place.

Figure 57: Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX3400 Switch

SEE ALSO

DC Power Supply in EX3400 Switches | 33

Maintaining a Transceiver

IN THIS SECTION

Install a Transceiver | 212

Remove a Transceiver | 215

212

Install a Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides

Figure 58 on page 215 shows how to install a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all types
of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To install a transceiver:
213

CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not

touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when

inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure that the transceiver is
aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver
unusable.

6. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated. If you are installing a CFP transceiver, use your
fingers to tighten the captive screws on the transceiver.
7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or

removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

NOTE: Make sure to use a dust cap to cover ports that are unused.

NOTE: While using Finisar AOC SFP+ optical module with the QFX5130-48C switch, you
may need to pull the module upwards to pull out the module smoothly from the cage.

NOTE: "
215

Figure 58: Install a Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

Remove a Transceiver

Before you remove a transceiver from a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions
for the safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector

• A dust cover to cover the port or a replacement transceiver

NOTE: After you remove a transceiver, or when you change the media-type configuration, wait
for 6 seconds for the interface to display the operational commands.

Figure 59 on page 217 shows how to remove a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all
types of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To remove a transceiver from a device:

1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.

216

2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
3. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when

inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

4. Remove the cable connected to the transceiver (see Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable). Cover the
transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately
after disconnecting the fiber-optic cables.
5. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its own
weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable
management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend the fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

6. To remove an SFP56-DD, SFP, SFP+, XFP, a QSFP+, or QSFP56-DD transceiver:

a. Using your fingers, pull open the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
Note that QSFP-DD and SFP-DD transceivers don't have ejector levers, they have a pull tab
instead which can be used to unlock and remove the transceiver.
217

CAUTION: Before removing the transceiver, make sure that you open the ejector
lever completely until you hear it click. This precaution prevents damage to the
transceiver.

b. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3 cm)
straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the transceiver, do not touch the connector
pins at the end of the transceiver.

Figure 59: Remove a QSFP+ Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

To remove a CFP transceiver:

a. Using your fingers, loosen the screws on the transceiver.

b. Grasp the screws on the transceiver and gently slide the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3 cm)
straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the transceiver, do not touch the connector
pins at the end of the transceiver.

7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the port.
8. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
9. Place the dust cover over the empty port, or install the replacement transceiver.
218

Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables

IN THIS SECTION

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 218

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 219

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables | 220

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable

To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device:

Figure 60: Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in a Device

Fiber-optic Transceiver
cable
g000704

4. Secure the cables so that they do not support their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in
a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables maintain their shape.
219

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable

Before you disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver, ensure that you have taken the
necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers. See Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver

• A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector

Juniper Networks devices have optical transceivers to which you can connect fiber-optic cables.

To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the device:

1. Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the following command:

[edit interfaces]
user@device# set interface-name disable

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.

3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when

inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.
220

4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables

Fiber-optic cables connect to optical transceivers that are installed in Juniper Networks devices.

Follow these guidelines when handling fiber-optic cables:

• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over the transceiver
and on the end of the cable.

• Anchor fiber-optic cables to prevent stress on the connectors. When attaching a fiber-optic cable to
a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it does not support its own weight as it
hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.

• Avoid bending fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. Bending fiber-optic cables into
arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that are
difficult to diagnose.

• Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cables in and out of optical instruments can damage
the instruments, which are expensive to repair. To prevent damage from overuse, attach a short fiber
extension to the optical equipment. The short fiber extension absorbs wear and tear due to frequent
plugging and unplugging, which is easier and less expensive to replace than the instruments.

• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Microdeposits of oil and dust in the canal of the transceiver
or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power, and possibly intermittent
problems with the optical connection.

• To clean the transceiver canal, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device such as RIFOCS Fiber
Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the instructions in the cleaning kit you
use.

• After cleaning the transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable is clean.
Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such as the Opptex Cletop-
S®Fiber Cleaner. Follow the instructions in the cleaning kit you use.
5CHAPTER

Troubleshooting Hardware

Troubleshooting EX3400 Components | 222

222

Troubleshooting EX3400 Components

IN THIS SECTION

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches | 222

Chassis Component Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches | 224

Check Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface | 227

Monitor System Log Messages | 228

Troubleshooting PoE Voltage Injection Failure in EX2300, EX3400, EX4300, or EX4400 Switch Models with
PoE Capability | 235

Troubleshooting Storage Issues While Upgrading Junos OS in EX2300 and EX3400 Switches | 236

Troubleshoot Temperature Alarms in EX Series Switches | 238

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches

NOTE: This topic applies only to the J-Web Application package.

Alarms alert you to conditions that might prevent normal operation of the switch. Before monitoring
alarms on a Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet switch, become familiar with the terms defined in
Table 56 on page 222.

Table 56: Alarm Terms

Term Definition

alarm Signal alerting you to conditions that might prevent normal operation. On a switch, the
alarm signal is the ALM LED lit on the front of the chassis.

alarm condition Failure event that triggers an alarm.

223

Table 56: Alarm Terms (Continued)

Term Definition

alarm severity Seriousness of the alarm. If the Alarm (ALM) LED is red, this indicates a major alarm. If
the Alarm LED is yellow or amber, this indicates a minor alarm. If the Alarm LED is unlit,
there is no alarm or the switch is halted.

chassis alarm Preset alarm triggered by a physical condition on the switch such as a power supply
failure, excessive component temperature, or media failure.

system alarm Preset alarm triggered by a missing rescue configuration or failure to install a license for
a licensed software feature.

NOTE: On EX6200 switches, a system alarm can be triggered by an internal link error.

Alarm Types

The switch supports these alarms:

• Chassis alarms indicate a failure on the switch or one of its components. Chassis alarms are preset
and cannot be modified.

• System alarms indicate a missing rescue configuration. System alarms are preset and cannot be
modified, although you can configure them to appear automatically in the J-Web interface display or
the CLI display.

Alarm Severity Levels

Alarms on switches have two severity levels:

• Major (red)—Indicates a critical situation on the switch that has resulted from one of the following
conditions. A red alarm condition requires immediate action.

• One or more hardware components have failed.

• One or more hardware components have exceeded temperature thresholds.

• An alarm condition configured on an interface has triggered a critical warning.

• Minor (yellow or amber)—Indicates a noncritical condition on the switch that, if left unchecked, might
cause an interruption in service or degradation in performance. A yellow or amber alarm condition
requires monitoring or maintenance.

A missing rescue configuration generates a yellow or amber system alarm.

224

SEE ALSO

Dashboard for EX Series Switches

Chassis Component Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches

This topic describes the chassis component alarm conditions on EX3400 switches.

Table 57 on page 224 lists the alarm conditions on EX3400 switches, their severity levels, and the
actions you can take to respond to them.

Table 57: Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches

Chassis Alarm Condition Alarm Remedy

Component Severity

Fan modules Fan module is not Major (red) Install the fan module.
installed.

Mix of fan modules with Major (red) Do not mix fan modules with different directions
different airflow for the airflow in the same chassis.
directions.

Mix of fan modules and Major (red) Do not mix fan modules and power supplies with
power supplies with different directions for the airflow in the same
different airflow chassis.
directions.

Power supplies A power supply has been Minor Install a power supply in the empty slot.
removed from the (yellow)
chassis.

The power supply is not Minor Check the input connection to the power supply.
switched on. (yellow)

An unknown power Major (red) Install a power supply recommended by Juniper

supply is installed. Networks.
225

Table 57: Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Chassis Alarm Condition Alarm Remedy

Component Severity

Mix of power supplies Major (red) Do not mix power supplies with different
with different airflow directions for the airflow in the same chassis.
directions.

Mix of fan modules and Major (red) Do not mix fan modules and power supplies with
power supplies with different directions for the airflow in the same
different airflow chassis.
directions.

Temperature The temperature inside Minor • Check the fan.

the chassis reaches the (yellow)
yellow alarm limit. • Open a support case using the Case Manager
link at https://www.juniper.net/support/ or call
1-888-314-5822 (toll-free within the United
States and Canada) or 1-408-745-9500 (from
outside the United States).

The temperature inside Major (red) • Check the fan.

the chassis reaches the
red alarm limit. • Open a support case using the Case Manager
link at https://www.juniper.net/support/ or call
1-888-314-5822 (toll-free within the United
States and Canada) or 1-408-745-9500 (from
outside the United States).

The temperature sensor Major (red) Open a support case using the Case Manager link
has failed. at https://www.juniper.net/support/ or call
1-888-314-5822 (toll-free within the United
States and Canada) or 1-408-745-9500 (from
outside the United States).
226

Table 57: Alarm Conditions on EX3400 Switches (Continued)

Chassis Alarm Condition Alarm Remedy

Component Severity

Management Management Ethernet Major (red) • Check whether a cable is connected to the
Ethernet link is down. management Ethernet interface, or whether
interface the cable is defective. Replace the cable if
required.

• If you are unable to resolve the problem, open

a support case using the Case Manager link at
https://www.juniper.net/support/ or call
1-888-314-5822 (toll-free within the United
States and Canada) or 1-408-745-9500 (from
outside the United States).

Routing Engine /var partition usage is Minor Clean up the system file storage space on the
high. (yellow) switch. For more information, see Freeing Up
System Storage Space.

/var partition is full. Major (red) Clean up the system file storage space on the
switch. For more information, see Freeing Up
System Storage Space.

Rescue configuration is Minor Use the request system configuration rescue save
not set. (yellow) command to set the rescue configuration.

Feature usage requires a Minor Install the required license for the feature specified
license or the license for (yellow) in the alarm. For more information, see
the feature usage has Understanding Software Licenses for EX Series
expired. Switches.

SEE ALSO

Field-Replaceable Units in EX3400 Switches | 12

Chassis Status LEDs in EX3400 Switches | 16
Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches | 222
227

Check Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface

IN THIS SECTION

Purpose | 227

Action | 227

Meaning | 227

Purpose

NOTE: This topic applies only to the J-Web Application package.

Use the monitoring functionality to view alarm information for the EX Series switches including alarm
type, alarm severity, and a brief description for each active alarm on the switching platform.

Action

To view the active alarms:

1. Select Monitor > Events and Alarms > View Alarms in the J-Web interface.

2. Select an alarm filter based on alarm type, severity, description, and date range.

3. Click Go.

All the alarms matching the filter are displayed.

NOTE: When the switch is reset, the active alarms are displayed.

Meaning

Table 58 on page 228 lists the alarm output fields.

228

Table 58: Summary of Key Alarm Output Fields

Field Values

Type Category of the alarm:

• Chassis—Indicates an alarm condition on the chassis (typically an environmental alarm

such as one related to temperature).

• System—Indicates an alarm condition in the system.

Severity Alarm severity—either major (red) or minor (yellow or amber).

Description Brief synopsis of the alarm.

Time Date and time when the failure was detected.

SEE ALSO

Monitor System Log Messages

Dashboard for EX Series Switches
Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches | 222

Monitor System Log Messages

IN THIS SECTION

Purpose | 229

Action | 229

Meaning | 232
229

Purpose

NOTE: This topic applies only to the J-Web Application package.

Use the monitoring functionality to filter and view system log messages for EX Series switches.

Action

To view events in the J-Web interface, select Monitor > Events and Alarms > View Events.

Apply a filter or a combination of filters to view messages. You can use filters to display relevant events.
Table 59 on page 229 describes the different filters, their functions, and the associated actions.

To view events in the CLI, enter the following command:

show log

Table 59: Filtering System Log Messages

Field Function Your Action

System Log File Specifies the name of a system log file To specify events recorded in a particular
for which you want to display the file, select the system log filename from
recorded events. the list— for example, messages.

Lists the names of all the system log files Select Include archived files to include
that you configure. archived files in the search.

By default, a log file, messages, is included

in the /var/log/ directory.

Process Specifies the name of the process To specify events generated by a process,
generating the events you want to type the name of the process.
display.
For example, type mgd to list all messages
To view all the processes running on generated by the management process.
your system, enter the CLI command
show system processes.

For more information about processes,

see the Junos OS Installation and
Upgrade Guide.
230

Table 59: Filtering System Log Messages (Continued)

Field Function Your Action

Date From Specifies the time period in which the To specify the time period:
events you want displayed are
To • Click the Calendar icon and select the
generated.
year, month, and date— for example,
Displays a calendar that allows you to 02/10/2007.
select the year, month, day, and time. It
also allows you to select the local time. • Click the Calendar icon and select the
year, month, and date— for example,
By default, the messages generated 02/10/2007.
during the last one hour are displayed.
End Time shows the current time and • Click to select the time in hours,
Start Time shows the time one hour minutes, and seconds.
before End Time.

Event ID Specifies the event ID for which you To specify events with a specific ID, type
want to display the messages. the partial or complete ID— for example,
TFTPD_AF_ERR.
Allows you to type part of the ID and
completes the remainder automatically.

An event ID, also known as a system log

message code, uniquely identifies a
system log message. It begins with a
prefix that indicates the generating
software process or library.

Description Specifies text from the description of To specify events with a specific
events that you want to display. description, type a text string from the
description with regular expression.
Allows you to use regular expressions to
match text from the event description. For example, type ^Initial* to display all
messages with lines beginning with the
NOTE: Regular expression matching is term Initial.
case-sensitive.

Search Applies the specified filter and displays To apply the filter and display messages,
the matching messages. click Search.

Reset Resets all the fields in the Events Filter To reset the field values that are listed in
box. the Events Filter box, click Reset.
231

Table 59: Filtering System Log Messages (Continued)

Field Function Your Action

Generate Raw Report Generates a list of event log messages in To generate a raw report:
nontabular format.
NOTE: 1. Click Generate Raw Report.

• Starting in Junos OS The Opening filteredEvents.html

Release 14.1X53, a window appears.
Raw Report can be
generated from the 2. Select Open with to open the HTML
log messages being file or select Save File to save the file.
loaded in the Events
Detail table. The 3. Click OK.
Generate Raw Report
button is enabled
after the event log
messages start
loading in the Events
Detail table.

• After the log

messages are
completely loaded in
the Events Detail
table, Generate Raw
Report changes to
Generate Report.
232

Table 59: Filtering System Log Messages (Continued)

Field Function Your Action

Generate Report Generates a list of event log messages in To generate a formatted report:
tabular format, which shows system
NOTE: Starting in Junos 1. Click Generate Report.
details, events filter criteria, and event
OS Release 14.1X53, a
details. The Opening Report.html window
Formatted Report can be
appears.
generated from event log
messages being loaded
2. Select Open with to open the HTML
in an Events Detail table.
file or select Save File to save the file.
The Generate Report
button appears only 3. Click OK.
after event log messages
are completely loaded in
the Events Detail table.
The Generate Raw
Report button is
displayed while event log
messages are being
loaded.

Meaning

Table 60 on page 233 describes the Event Summary fields.

NOTE: By default, the View Events page in the J-Web interface displays the most recent 25
events, with severity levels highlighted in different colors. After you specify the filters, Event
Summary displays the events matching the specified filters. Click the First, Next, Prev, and Last
links to navigate through messages.
233

Table 60: Viewing System Log Messages

Field Function Additional Information

Process Displays the name and ID of the process that The information displayed in this field is
generated the system log message. different for messages generated on the local
Routing Engine than for messages generated
on another Routing Engine (on a system with
two Routing Engines installed and
operational). Messages from the other Routing
Engine also include the identifiers re0 and re1
that identify the Routing Engine.

Severity Severity level of a message is indicated by A severity level indicates how seriously the
different colors. triggering event affects switch functions.
When you configure a location for logging a
• Unknown—Gray—Indicates no severity level facility, you also specify a severity level for the
is specified. facility. Only messages from the facility that
are rated at that level or higher are logged to
• Debug/Info/Notice—Green—Indicates
the specified file.
conditions that are not errors but are of
interest or might warrant special handling.

• Warning—Yellow or Amber—Indicates
conditions that warrant monitoring.

• Error—Blue—Indicates standard error

conditions that generally have less serious
consequences than errors in the emergency,
alert, and critical levels.

• Critical—Pink—Indicates critical conditions,

such as hard-drive errors.

• Alert—Orange—Indicates conditions that

require immediate correction, such as a
corrupted system database.

• Emergency—Red—Indicates system panic or

other conditions that cause the switch to
stop functioning.
234

Table 60: Viewing System Log Messages (Continued)

Field Function Additional Information

Event ID Displays a code that uniquely identifies the The event ID begins with a prefix that
message. indicates the generating software process.

The prefix on each code identifies the message Some processes on a switch do not use codes.
source, and the rest of the code indicates the This field might be blank in a message
specific event or error. generated from such a process.

An event can belong to one of the following

type categories:

• Error—Indicates an error or failure

condition that might require corrective
action.

• Event—Indicates a condition or occurrence

that does not generally require corrective
action.

Event Displays a more detailed explanation of the

Description message.

Time Displays the time at which the message was

logged.

SEE ALSO

Check Active Alarms with the J-Web Interface

Understand Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches
235

Troubleshooting PoE Voltage Injection Failure in EX2300, EX3400,

EX4300, or EX4400 Switch Models with PoE Capability

IN THIS SECTION

Problem | 235

Solution | 236

Problem

Description

Devices that draw power from EX2300, EX3400, EX4300 or EX4400 switch models with Power over
Ethernet (PoE) capability do not get power from those switches. The problem persists after rebooting
the switches or upgrading to the latest version of Junos OS. PoE stops working on Juniper EX3400,
EX2300, EX4300, or EX4400 devices during initial installation. It is noticed that the new PDs connected
to the POE devices do not power up.

• When the PoE ports of the Switches - EX2200, EX3200, EX4200, and EX4400 are connected to the
PoE ports of EX3400, EX4300, EX2300, EX4400, the PoE functionality would be affected on
EX4300, EX3400, EX2300, EX4400 switches. This is an expected behavior.

• When an EX3400 is connected to another EX3400 or an EX4300 is connected to an EX3400 the PoE
operates in a normal manner - This is an expected behavior.

Debugging and confirming voltage injection by analyzing the PoE port status on Juniper
switches

Voltage injection on PoE port scan can be identified by enabling syslog any any on EX3400, EX2300,
EX4300, and EX4400.

In show log messages, any POE voltage injection port with status 36 indicates this problem. This is
caused due to PoE power injected to the ports on EX3400, EX4300, EX2300, and EX4400.

Port status 36 is due to the mutual powering of switches. This is because Juniper switches support
legacy device detection. Switches that supports legacy detection will detect other switches as a legacy
device, and power each other.
236

Solution

When connecting uplink devices to EX3400, EX4300, EX2300, EX4400, ensure PoE is disabled on the
interface (uplink device). PoE must be enabled only on interfaces where Access Points/VOIP Phones or
any other PoE powered devices are connected.

Use the following command

set poe interface <interface name>

When connecting EX4200, EX3200, EX2200 to EX4400, EX4300, EX3400, and EX2300, disable PoE on
legacy switches (EX4200, EX3200, EX2200) as below:

set poe interface ge-0/0/0 disable

SEE ALSO

Understanding PoE on EX Series Switches

Troubleshooting Storage Issues While Upgrading Junos OS in EX2300

and EX3400 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Problem | 236

Cause | 237

Solution | 237

Problem

Description

Upgrading Junos OS in EX2300 and EX3400 switches fails.

237

Symptoms

When you upgrade Junos OS in EX2300 and EX3400 switches, you get the error not enough space to
unpack installation-pack-name.

Cause

There is not enough memory in the switch to install the upgrade installation package.

Solution

If upgrading Junos OS in EX2300 and EX3400 switches fails due to the lack of memory in the switch:

1. Perform a system storage cleanup and delete unwanted files in the system storage by using the
command:

user@switch> request system storage cleanup

NOTE: You can get the list of files that this command deletes by using the command:

user@switch> request system

storage cleanup dry-run

This command does not delete files in the root folder; it deletes files in the folders jail, log, and
tmp only.

2. If any directory is taking up a lot of memory, delete unwanted files in that directory. Check the
memory utilization by using the command:

user@switch> show system storage

3. Delete non-recovery snapshots.

• If Junos OS 15.1X53D56 or later is installed in your switch:

a. Delete non-recovery snapshots by using the command:

user@switch> request system

software add software-image-name force
238

• If a version of Junos OS released earlier than Junos OS 15.1X53D56 is installed in your switch:

a. Check for non-recovery snapshots by using the command:

user@switch> show system snapshot

b.
NOTE: Snapshot names are not completed automatically in the CLI; you must enter the
snapshot name.

Delete non-recovery snapshots by using the command:

user@switch> request system

snapshot delete snapshot-name

4. After upgrading Junos OS, delete the upgrade installation package by using the command:

user@switch> request system software

add software-image-name force unlink

SEE ALSO

Understanding Software Installation on EX Series Switches

Troubleshoot Temperature Alarms in EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Problem | 239

Cause | 239

Solution | 239
239

Problem

Description

EX Series switches trigger a temperature alarm FPC 0 EX-PFE1 Temp Too Hot when the switch temperature
becomes too hot.

Cause

Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature of the chassis. The switch triggers an alarm
if a fan fails or if the temperature of the chassis exceeds permissible levels for some other reason.

Solution

When the switch triggers a temperature alarm such as the FPC 0 EX-PFE1 Temp Too Hot alarm, use the show
chassis environment and the show chassis temperature-thresholds commands to identify the condition that
triggered the alarm.

CAUTION: To prevent the switch from overheating, operate it in an area with an

ambient temperature within the recommended range. To prevent airflow restriction,
allow at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.

1. Connect to the switch by using Telnet, and issue the show chassis environment command. This command
displays environmental information about the switch chassis, including the temperature. The
command also displays information about the fans, power supplies, and Routing Engines. Following is
a sample output on an EX9208 switch. The output is similar on other EX Series switches.

show chassis environment (EX9208 Switch)

user@switch> show chassis environment

Class Item Status Measurement

Temp PEM 0 OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
PEM 1 OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
PEM 2 Absent
PEM 3 Absent
Routing Engine 0 OK 37 degrees C / 98 degrees F
Routing Engine 0 CPU OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F
Routing Engine 1 Absent
Routing Engine 1 CPU Absent
240

CB 0 Intake OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F

CB 0 Exhaust A OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F
CB 0 Exhaust B OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
CB 0 ACBC OK 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F
CB 0 XF A OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F
CB 0 XF B OK 45 degrees C / 113 degrees F
CB 1 Intake Absent
CB 1 Exhaust A Absent
CB 1 Exhaust B Absent
CB 1 ACBC Absent
CB 1 XF A Absent
CB 1 XF B Absent
FPC 3 Intake OK 48 degrees C / 118 degrees F
FPC 3 Exhaust A OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F
FPC 3 Exhaust B OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F
FPC 3 XL TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XL Chip OK 58 degrees C / 136 degrees F
FPC 3 XL_XR0 TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XL_XR0 Chip OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F
FPC 3 XL_XR1 TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XL_XR1 Chip OK 63 degrees C / 145 degrees F
FPC 3 XQ TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XQ Chip OK 63 degrees C / 145 degrees F
FPC 3 XQ_XR0 TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XQ_XR0 Chip OK 68 degrees C / 154 degrees F
FPC 3 XM TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XM Chip OK 76 degrees C / 168 degrees F
FPC 3 XF TSen OK 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
FPC 3 XF Chip OK 75 degrees C / 167 degrees F
FPC 3 PLX PCIe Switch TSe OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F
FPC 3 PLX PCIe Switch Chi OK 54 degrees C / 129 degrees F
FPC 3 Aloha FPGA 0 TSen OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F
FPC 3 Aloha FPGA 0 Chip OK 70 degrees C / 158 degrees F
FPC 3 Aloha FPGA 1 TSen OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F
FPC 3 Aloha FPGA 1 Chip OK 75 degrees C / 167 degrees F
FPC 5 Intake Testing
FPC 5 Exhaust A Testing
FPC 5 Exhaust B Testing
Fans Top Rear Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed
Bottom Rear Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed
Top Middle Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed
Bottom Middle Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed
241

Top Front Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed

Bottom Front Fan OK Spinning at intermediate-speed

Table 61 on page 241 lists the output fields for the show chassis environment command. The table lists
output fields in the approximate order in which they appear.

Table 61: show chassis environment Output Fields

Field Name Field Description

Class Information about the category or class of chassis component:

• Temp: Temperature of air flowing through the chassis in degrees Celsius (°C) and
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)

• Fans: Information about the status of fans and blowers

Item Information about the chassis components:

• Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)—that is, the line cards

• Control Boards (CBs)

• Routing Engines

• Power entry modules (PEMs)—that is, the power supplies

Status Status of the specified chassis component. For example, if Class is Fans, the fan status
can be:

• OK: The fans are operational.

• Testing: The fans are being tested during initial power-on.

• Failed: The fans have failed or the fans are not spinning.

• Absent: The fan tray is not installed.

Measurement Depends on the Class. For example, if Class is Temp, indicates the temperature in degrees
Celsius (°C) and degrees Fahrenheit (°F). If the Class is Fans, indicates actual fan RPM.
242

2. Issue the command show chassis temperature-thresholds . This command displays the chassis
temperature threshold settings. The following is a sample output on an EX9208 switch. The output is
similar on other EX Series switches.

show chassis temperature-thresholds (EX9208 Switch)

user@ host> show chassis temperature-thresholds

Fan speed Yellow alarm Red alarm Fire Shutdown
(degrees C) (degrees C) (degrees C) (degrees C)
Item Normal High Normal Bad fan Normal Bad fan Normal
Chassis default 48 54 65 55 80 65 100
Routing Engine 0 70 80 95 95 110 110 112
FPC 3 55 60 75 65 105 80 110
FPC 5 55 60 75 65 90 80 95

Table 62 on page 242 lists the output fields for the show chassis temperature-thresholds command. The
table lists output fields in the approximate order in which they appear.

Table 62: show chassis temperature-thresholds Output Fields

Field Name Field Description

Item Chassis component. You can configure the threshold information

for components such as the chassis, the Routing Engines, and FPC
for each slot in each FRU to display in the output. By default,
information is displayed only for the chassis and the Routing
Engines.

Fan speed Temperature thresholds, in degrees Celsius, for the fans to operate
at normal and at high speed.

• Normal—The temperature threshold at which the fans operate

at normal speed and when all the fans are present and
functioning normally.

• High—The temperature threshold at which the fans operate at

high speed or when a fan has failed or is missing.

NOTE: An alarm is triggered when the temperature exceeds the

threshold settings for a yellow, amber, or red alarm.
243

Table 62: show chassis temperature-thresholds Output Fields (Continued)

Field Name Field Description

Yellow or amber alarm Temperature threshold, in degrees Celsius, that triggers a yellow or
amber alarm.

• Normal—The temperature threshold that must be exceeded on

the device to trigger a yellow or amber alarm when the fans are
running at full speed.

• Bad fan—The temperature threshold that must be exceeded on

the device to trigger a yellow or amber alarm when one or more
fans have failed or are missing.

Red alarm Temperature threshold, in degrees Celsius, that triggers a red alarm.

• Normal—The temperature threshold that must be exceeded on

the device to trigger a red alarm when the fans are running at
full speed.

• Bad fan—The temperature threshold that must be exceeded on

the device to trigger a red alarm when one or more fans have
failed or are missing.

Fire shutdown Temperature threshold, in degrees Celsius, at which the switch

shuts down in case of fire.

When a temperature alarm is triggered, you can identify the condition that triggered it by running the
show chassis environment command to display the chassis temperature values for each component and
comparing those with the temperature threshold values. You can display the temperature threshold
values by running the show chassis temperature-thresholds command.

For example, for FPC 3:

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 55° C, the output indicates that the fans are operating at a high
speed (no alarm is triggered).

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 65° C, a yellow alarm is triggered to indicate that one or more
fans have failed.

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 75° C, a yellow alarm is triggered to indicate that the temperature
threshold limit is exceeded.
244

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 80° C, a red alarm is triggered to indicate that one or more fans
have failed.

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 105° C, a red alarm is triggered to indicate that the temperature
threshold limit is exceeded.

• If the temperature of FPC 3 exceeds 110° C, the switch is powered off.

Table 63 on page 244 lists the possible causes for the switch to generate a temperature alarm. It also
lists the respective remedies.

Table 63: Causes and Remedies for Temperature Alarms

Cause Remedy

Ambient temperature is above Ensure that the ambient temperature is within the threshold temperature limit.
threshold temperature. See Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches.

Fan module or fan tray has Perform the following steps:

failed.
1. Check the fan.

2. Replace the faulty fan module or fan tray.

3. If the above two checks show no problems, open a support case using the
Case Manager link at https://www.juniper.net/support/ or call
1-888-314-5822 (toll-free within the United States and Canada) or
1-408-745-9500 (from outside the United States).

Restricted airflow through the Ensure that there is sufficient clearance around the installed switch.
switch due to insufficient
clearance around the installed
switch.

Change History Table

Feature support is determined by the platform and release you are using. Use Feature Explorer to
determine if a feature is supported on your platform.

Release Description

14.1X53 Starting in Junos OS Release 14.1X53, a Raw Report can be generated from the log messages being
loaded in the Events Detail table.
245

14.1X53 Starting in Junos OS Release 14.1X53, a Formatted Report can be generated from event log messages
being loaded in an Events Detail table.
6 CHAPTER

Contacting Customer Support and

Returning the Chassis or Components

Returning an EX3400 Chassis or Components | 247

247

Returning an EX3400 Chassis or Components

IN THIS SECTION

Returning an EX3400 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement | 247

Locating the Serial Number on an EX3400 Switch or Component | 248

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization | 250

Packing an EX3400 Switch or Component for Shipping | 251

Returning an EX3400 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement

If you need to return an EX3400 switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, follow this procedure:

1. Determine the serial number of the component. For instructions, see "Locating the Serial Number on
an EX3400 Switch or Component" on page 248.
2. Obtain an RMA number from JTAC as described in Contact Customer Support to Obtain Return
Material Authorization.

NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an
RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an
RMA. Refused shipments are returned to the customer through collect freight.

3. Pack the switch or component for shipping as described in "Packing an EX3400 Switch or
Component for Shipping" on page 251.

For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at https://
www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.
248

Locating the Serial Number on an EX3400 Switch or Component

IN THIS SECTION

Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI | 248

Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3400 Switch | 249

If you are returning an EX3400 switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, you must locate the serial number of the switch or component. You must provide the serial
number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) when you contact them to obtain
Return Material Authorization (RMA).

If the switch is operational and you can access the CLI, you can list serial numbers for the switch and for
some components with a CLI command. If you do not have access to the CLI or if the serial number for
the component does not appear in the command output, you can locate the serial number ID label on
the physical switch (see Figure 61 on page 249 and Figure 62 on page 249) or component.

NOTE: If you want to find the serial number on the physical switch component, you will need to
remove the component from the switch chassis, for which you must have the required parts and
tools available.

Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI

To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, enter the following CLI command:

user@switch> show
chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item Version Part number Serial number Description
Chassis NY0215350046
Routing Engine 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN RE-EX3400-48P
FPC 0 REV 05 650-059857 NY0215350046 EX3400-48P
CPU BUILTIN BUILTIN FPC CPU
PIC 0 REV 05 BUILTIN BUILTIN 48x10/100/1000 Base-T
PIC 1 REV 05 650-059857 NY0215350046 2x40G QSFP
Xcvr 0 REV 740-044512 APF14500007NFC QSFP+-40G-CU50CM
PIC 2 REV 05 650-059857 NY0215350046 4x10G SFP/SFP+
249

Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-021308 1YT511104293 SFP+-10G-SR

Power Supply 0 REV 02 640-060601 1EDS5250082 JPSU-920W-AC-AFO
Fan Tray 0 Fan Module, Airflow Out (AFO)
Fan Tray 1 Fan Module, Airflow Out (AFO)

Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3400 Switch

EX3400 switches shipped after 2 February, 2017 have serial number ID label on the side panel of the
chassis (see Figure 61 on page 249) and on the rear panel of the chassis (see Figure 62 on page 249).
EX3400 switches shipped before 2 February, 2017 have the serial number ID label only on the side
panel of the chassis.

Figure 61: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Side Panel of an EX3400 Switch

1— Serial Number ID Label

Figure 62: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Rear Panel of an EX3400 Switch

1— Serial Number ID Label

250

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization

If you need to return a device or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC). You must obtain an RMA number before you attempt to return the component.

After locating the serial number of the device or hardware component you want to return, open a
service request with the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on the Web or by
telephone.

Before you request an RMA number from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:

• Your existing service request number, if you have one

• Serial number of the component

• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address

• Details of the failure or problem

• Type of activity being performed on the device when the problem occurred

• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands

You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on the Web or by telephone:

• Service Request Manager: https://support.juniper.net/support

• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC (+1-888-314-5822), toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico

NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll free numbers, see https://
support.juniper.net/support.

If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 12-digit service request number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next available support
engineer.

The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the
component.
251

Packing an EX3400 Switch or Component for Shipping

IN THIS SECTION

Packing a Switch for Shipping | 251

Packing Switch Components for Shipping | 252

If you are returning an EX3400 switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
pack the item as described in this topic.

Before you begin, ensure that you have retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials.
Contact your JTAC representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about approved packing
materials. See Contact Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Antistatic bag, one for each switch or component

• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2

Packing a Switch for Shipping

To pack a switch for shipping:

1. On the console or other management device connected to the switch, enter the CLI operational
mode and issue the following command to shut down the switch software:

user@switch> request
system halt

Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted.
2. Disconnect power from the switch by performing one of the following:

• If the power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the OFF (0) position.

• If the power source outlet does not have a power switch, gently pull out the plug end of the
power cord connected to the power source outlet.
3. Remove the cables that connect the switch to all external devices. See Disconnect a Fiber-Optic
Cable.
4. Remove all optical transceivers installed in the switch. See Remove a Transceiver.
252

5. If the switch is mounted on a wall or on two posts, have one person support the weight of the
switch while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws. Use the Phillips (+)
screwdriver to remove the screws.
6. Remove the switch from the wall, rack, cabinet, or desk and place the switch in an antistatic bag.
7. Slip on the end caps of the packaging foam on both sides of the switch.
8. Place the switch in the shipping carton.
9. Place the packing foam on top of and around the switch.
10. If you are returning accessories or FRUs with the switch, pack them as instructed in "Packing Switch
Components for Shipping" on page 252.
11. Close the top of the cardboard carton and seal it with packing tape.
12. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the carton to ensure proper tracking.

Packing Switch Components for Shipping

To pack and ship switch components:

• Place individual components in antistatic bags.

• Ensure that the components are adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the
pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton.

• Close the top of the cardboard shipping carton and seal it with packing tape.

• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the carton to ensure proper tracking.
7 CHAPTER

Safety and Compliance Information

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 255

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels | 256

Qualified Personnel Warning | 258

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden | 258

Fire Safety Requirements | 259

Installation Instructions Warning | 260

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines | 261

Restricted Access Warning | 261

Ramp Warning | 263

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263

Grounded Equipment Warning | 267

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 268

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning | 271

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 272

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 278

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident | 279

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage | 280

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 281

AC Power Disconnection Warning | 282

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 283

DC Power Disconnection Warning | 284

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning | 288

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning | 289

TN Power Warning | 290

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches | 291

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches | 293

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches | 297

255

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings

The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the device from damage. The list of
guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment, so be
alert and exercise good judgment at all times.

• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for this device.
Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services.

• Keep the area around the device clear and free from dust before, during, and after installation.

• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.

• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could become caught
in the device.

• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes.

• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe.

• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.

• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.

• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet
environments.

• Operate the device only when it is properly grounded.

• Follow the instructions in this guide to properly ground the device to earth.

• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.

• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are provided in the
hardware documentation for this device. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.

• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an action could
result in electrical shock or fire.

• Avoid spilling liquid onto the chassis or onto any device component. Such an action could cause
electrical shock or damage the device.

• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected from their
power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
256

• Some parts of the chassis, including AC and DC power supply surfaces, power supply unit handles,
SFB card handles, and fan tray handles might become hot. The following label provides the warning
for hot surfaces on the chassis:

• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted and that the
installation screws are fully tightened.

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels

The documentation uses the following levels of safety warnings (there are two Warning formats):

NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or you might overlook this
important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.

CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to prevent minor injury or
discomfort to you or severe damage to the device.
Attention Veillez à respecter les consignes indiquées pour éviter toute incommodité ou
blessure légère, voire des dégâts graves pour l’appareil.

LASER WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
Avertissement Ce symbole signale un risque de blessure provoquée par rayon laser.

WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry, and familiarize yourself with standard practices for preventing
accidents.
257

Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie

die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken,
dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient
u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.

Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa
ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää
sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
ehkäisykeinoista.

Avertissement Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans

une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de
travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits
électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter
les accidents.

Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die
zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem
Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren
und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.

Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe

causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre
conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche
standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan føre
til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de
faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig
praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá
causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento,
familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer
práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.

¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física.
Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la corriente
eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes.

Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan
leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara
medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga
skador.
258

Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the device.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.

Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.

Avertissement Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du

personnel qualifié et compétent.

Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder

auswechseln lassen.

Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare

o sostituire questo apparecchio.

Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut dette
utstyret.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.

¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por

personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.

Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
kvalificerad personal.

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden

WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.

Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.

Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.

259

Fire Safety Requirements

IN THIS SECTION

Fire Suppression | 259

Fire Suppression Equipment | 259

In the event of a fire emergency, the safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish
procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly
provision fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.

In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire emergency.
Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment. We
recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the
equipment and that all local fire, safety, and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you
install and operate your equipment.

Fire Suppression

In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to the equipment
at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive fire retardants, to extinguish
the fire.

Fire Suppression Equipment

Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide and Halotron™,
are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire extinguishers displace oxygen from the
point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air
from the environment for cooling, you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher
instead of an extinguisher that leaves residues on equipment.

Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire extinguishers). The
primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and
260

difficult to clean. In addition, in the presence of minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium

phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals.

Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to
premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged.

NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control a fire
at or near a Juniper Networks device. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used, the unit is no
longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.

We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally

responsible manner.

Installation Instructions Warning

WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the device to a power
source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.

Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.

Avertissement Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les

directives d'installation.

Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.

Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema

all'alimentatore.

Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.

Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.

¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de

alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess

strömförsörjningsenhet.
261

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines

• Before moving the device to a site, ensure that the site meets the power, environmental, and
clearance requirements.

• Before lifting or moving the device, disconnect all external cables and wires.

• As when lifting any heavy object, ensure that your legs bear most of the weight rather than your
back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight. Do not twist your body as you lift.
Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is firm.

• Use the following lifting guidelines to lift devices and components:

• Up to 39.7 lb (18 kg): One person.

• From 39.7 lb (18 kg) to 70.5 lb (32 kg): Two or more people.

• From 70.5 lb (32 kg) to 121.2 lb (55 kg): Three or more people.

• Above 121.2 lb (55 kg): Use material handling systems (such as levers, slings, lifts, and so on).
When this is not practical, engage specially trained persons or systems (such as riggers or movers).

Restricted Access Warning

WARNING: This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted
access area is an area to which access can be gained only by service personnel through
the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security, and which is
controlled by the authority responsible for the location.
Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte toegang.
Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door
servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument, een
slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke beheerd wordt door de
overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.

Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua.

Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain huoltohenkilöstö
pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen
avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.
262

Avertissement Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Ces dernières
sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un outil
spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de sécurité.
L'accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le contrôle de l'autorité responsable de
l'emplacement.

Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt
vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur
Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die Anlage zuständigen
Gremium kontrolliert wird.

Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato. Un'area
ad accesso limitato è un'area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite
un'attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è controllata
dall'autorità responsabile della zona.

Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang. Et
område med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et
spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres
av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.

Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área
de acesso restrito é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço autorizado,
que possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer outra forma de
segurança. Esta área é controlada pela autoridade responsável pelo local.

¡Atención! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso restringido.
Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene acceso el personal
de servicio mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial, cerradura con llave, o
algún otro medio de seguridad, y que está bajo el control de la autoridad responsable
del local.

Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde. Ett
område med begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett speciellt
verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras av den
auktoritet som ansvarar för området.
263

Ramp Warning

WARNING: When installing the device, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.

Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.

Avertissement Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.

Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.

Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.

Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.

¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados.

Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings

Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the device is installed is evenly and securely supported. Uneven
mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.

WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the device in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:

• Install the device in a rack that is secured to the building structure.

• Mount the device at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack.

• When mounting the device on a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
to the top, with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
264

• If the rack is provided with stabilizing equipment, install the stabilizers before
mounting or servicing the device in the rack.

Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek

monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen
nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen
worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:

• De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan een
bouwsel is verankerd.

• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige
in het rek is.

• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van
onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.

• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te

monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt
geeft.

Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on
noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta
vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:

• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty

rakennukseen.

• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.

• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen

alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.

• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen

tai sen huoltamista siinä.

Avertissement Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de montage
ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions
spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont
destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:

• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à la structure
du bâtiment.
265

• Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le
bas.

• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de
bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.

• Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant de

monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser
Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:

• Der Juniper Networks switch muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.

• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht
werden.

• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von
unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell
anzubringen ist.

• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.

Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa

unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema
rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza
personale:

• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.

• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica unità
da montare nel supporto.

• Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il

supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del
supporto.

• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di

montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
266

Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne

enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.
Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:

• Juniper Networks switch må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til

bygningsstrukturen.

• Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i
kabinettet.

• Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet
lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.

• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før

montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.

Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa
estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui
um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com
segurança:

• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura do
edificio.

• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única
unidade a ser montada.

• Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais
pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.

• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou

reparar a unidade.

¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor,
oeriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el
sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las siguientes
instrucciones:

• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del

edificio.

• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el
mismo.
267

• Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,

comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo
más pesado en la parte inferior.

• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar

o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.

Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete på
denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder för att
försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att trygga din
säkerhet:

• Juniper Networks switch måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i

byggnadens struktur.

• Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned
på ställningen.

• Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån
och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.

• Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan

enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

Grounded Equipment Warning

WARNING: This device must be properly grounded at all times. Follow the instructions
in this guide to properly ground the device to earth.
Waarschuwing Dit apparaat moet altijd goed geaard zijn. Volg de instructies in deze
gids om het apparaat goed te aarden.

Varoitus Laitteen on oltava pysyvästi maadoitettu. Maadoita laite asianmukaisesti

noudattamalla tämän oppaan ohjeita.

Avertissement L’appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre à tout moment. Suivez les
instructions de ce guide pour correctement mettre l’appareil à la terre.

Warnung Das Gerät muss immer ordnungsgemäß geerdet sein. Befolgen Sie die
Anweisungen in dieser Anleitung, um das Gerät ordnungsgemäß zu erden.
268

Avvertenza Questo dispositivo deve sempre disporre di una connessione a massa.

Seguire le istruzioni indicate in questa guida per connettere correttamente il dispositivo
a massa.

Advarsel Denne enheten på jordes skikkelig hele tiden. Følg instruksjonene i denne
veiledningen for å jorde enheten.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Siga las instrucciones en esta guía
para conectar correctamente este dispositivo a tierra.

¡Atención! Este dispositivo debe estar correctamente conectado a tierra en todo

momento. Siga las instrucciones en esta guía para conectar correctamente este
dispositivo a tierra.

Varning! Den här enheten måste vara ordentligt jordad. Följ instruktionerna i den här
guiden för att jorda enheten ordentligt.

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings

IN THIS SECTION

General Laser Safety Guidelines | 269

Class 1 Laser Product Warning | 269

Class 1 LED Product Warning | 270

Laser Beam Warning | 270

Juniper Networks devices are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a Class 1 Laser
Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per
IEC/EN 60825-1 requirements.

Observe the following guidelines and warnings:

269

General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following safety guidelines to
prevent eye injury:

• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.

• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.

• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.

LASER WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation.
The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the
eye directly on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the
eye.
Avertissement Les connecteurs à fibre optique sans terminaison peuvent émettre un
rayonnement laser invisible. Le cristallin de l’œil humain faisant converger toute la
puissance du laser sur la rétine, toute focalisation directe de l’œil sur une source laser,
—même de faible puissance—, peut entraîner des lésions oculaires irréversibles.

Class 1 Laser Product Warning

LASER WARNING: Class 1 laser product.

Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.

Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.

Avertissement Produit laser de classe I.

Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.

Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.

Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.

Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.

¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.

Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.

270

Class 1 LED Product Warning

LASER WARNING: Class 1 LED product.

Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.

Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.

Avertissement Alarme de produit LED Class I.

Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.

Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.

Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.

Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.

¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.

Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.

Laser Beam Warning

LASER WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical
instruments.
Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.

Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen avulla.

Avertissement Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide

d'instruments optiques.

Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Geräten
prüfen.

Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo
direttamente.

Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.

271

Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.

¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos

ópticos.

Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom optiska
instrument.

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning

LASER WARNING: Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture of
the port when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare
into open apertures.
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan
komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken
in open openingen vermeden te worden.

Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun kuitukaapelia ei
ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin aukkoihin.

Avertissement Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du port

lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas
regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.

Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn kein
Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen,
und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!

Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono essere
emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate
direttamente nelle aperture.

Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne, fordi
usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel.

Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da via de

acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá evitar an
272

EXposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se encontrarem a
descoberto.

¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible cuando
no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no
exponerse a la radiación.

Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och
du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade
öppningar.

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and

Warnings

IN THIS SECTION

Battery Handling Warning | 272

Jewelry Removal Warning | 274

Lightning Activity Warning | 275

Operating Temperature Warning | 276

Product Disposal Warning | 277

While performing the maintenance activities for devices, observe the following guidelines and warnings:

Battery Handling Warning

WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace a

battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
273

Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt.

Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant
aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften
weggeworpen te worden.

Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä vaihtamiseen
ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan suosittelema.
Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.

Avertissement Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement. Ne la

remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par le
fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Ersetzen Sie
die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp.
Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers.

Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte. Skift kun
med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser brukte
batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata correttamente.

Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal produttore. Eliminare
le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.

Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente. Substitua

a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante.
Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.

¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera incorrecta.

Reemplazar la baterían EXclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones
del fabricante.

Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med samma
batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ tillverkarens
anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
274

Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove

jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when connected
to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can be welded to the terminals.
Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is
verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen. Metalen
voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen
ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen
lassen.

Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa, ota

pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien). Metalliesineet
kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne voivat aiheuttaa
vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.

Avertissement Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques, ôter
tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à
l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut provoquer
des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.

Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind, jeglichen
Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen. Metallgegenstände
erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden, und können
schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt
werden.

Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione,

togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi). Gli oggetti
metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa: possono
causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.

Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du skal arbeide
på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet til
kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader eller
smelte fast til polene.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente, retire
todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os objectos metálicos
aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo
causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.
275

¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de alimentación, quitarse

las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando
se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o
que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.

Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du
arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas upp när de
kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt
kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.

Lightning Activity Warning

WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
of lightning activity.
Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet aan het
systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota kaapeleita
ukkosilmalla.

Avertissement Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles

pendant un orage.

Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an bzw. trennen
Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un
temporale con fulmini.

Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet når det
tordner eller lyner.

Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos de mau
tempo (trovoada).

¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso

de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss
kablar.
276

Operating Temperature Warning

WARNING: To prevent the device from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature. To prevent airflow
restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.
Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networks router dan
ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale
aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° C wordt overschreden. Om te voorkomen
dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-
openingen te zijn.

Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei saa käyttää
tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun ympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei
ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.

Avertissement Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper

Networks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est
supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au moins
15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser nicht in
einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene
Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern, achten Sie
darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei
bleibt.

Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in un locale che
ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitare che la circolazione
dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle
ventole.

Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks switch Disse

skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen
overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringen rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm
(6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.

Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks switch, não

utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima recomendada de
40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos um espaço de 15,2 cm
à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
277

¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks switch se

recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente
máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada de aire, deje un
espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilación.

Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genom att inte använda
den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen på 40° C
överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks genom att se till att det finns fritt
utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring ventilationsöppningarna.

Product Disposal Warning

WARNING: Disposal of this device must be handled according to all national laws and
regulations.
Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te
worden afgedankt.

Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia

valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.

Avertissement La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée

conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend
entsorgt werden.

Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le

normative italiane vigenti in materia

Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og
forskrifter.

Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo com os
regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las leyes y
regulaciones nacionales

Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets alla lagar
och föreskrifter.
278

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

WARNING: Certain ports on the device are designed for use as intrabuilding (within-
the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE)
and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP) cabling. To comply with
NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System) requirements and protect against lightning
surges and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be
metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The
intrabuilding ports on the device are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or
unexposed wiring or cabling only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient
protection for connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Avertissement Certains ports de l’appareil sont destinés à un usage en intérieur
uniquement (ports Type 2 ou Type 4 tels que décrits dans le document GR-1089-CORE)
et doivent être isolés du câblage de l’installation extérieure exposée. Pour respecter les
exigences NEBS et assurer une protection contre la foudre et les perturbations de
tension secteur, les ports pour intérieur ne doivent pas être raccordés physiquement
aux interfaces prévues pour la connexion à l’installation extérieure ou à son câblage. Les
ports pour intérieur de l’appareil sont réservés au raccordement de câbles pour intérieur
ou non exposés uniquement. L’ajout de protections ne constitue pas une précaution
suffisante pour raccorder physiquement ces interfaces au câblage de l’installation
extérieure.

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a device, connect an

electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to an ESD point and wrap and fasten the
other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure to use an ESD grounding strap
could result in damage to the device.
Attention Avant de retirer ou d’installer des composants d’un appareil, raccordez un
bracelet antistatique à un point de décharge électrostatique et fixez le bracelet à votre
poignet nu. L’absence de port d’un bracelet antistatique pourrait provoquer des dégâts
sur l’appareil.

• Install the device in compliance with the following local, national, and international electrical codes:

• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States National Electrical
Code.

• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1 through Part 7.

• Evaluated to the TN power system.

279

• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

• Suitable for installation in Information Technology Rooms in accordance with Article 645 of the
National Electrical Code and NFPA 75.

Peut être installé dans des salles de matériel de traitement de l’information conformément à
l’article 645 du National Electrical Code et à la NFPA 75.

• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical
accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.

• Make sure that you clean grounding surface and give them a bright finish before making grounding
connections.

• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace.

• Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before starting to
work.

• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded power
extension cords, and missing safety grounds.

• Operate the device within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.

• To ensure that the device and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly, use the cables and
connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, and make certain they are in good
condition.

You can remove and replace many device components without powering off or disconnecting power to
the device, as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation for this device. Never install
equipment that appears to be damaged.

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident

If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:

1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury.

2. Disconnect power from the device.

3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition of the victim, and
then call for help.
280

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Device components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from static electricity.
Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can easily generate potentially
damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move
components across plastic or carpets. Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for
electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

• Always use an ESD wrist strap when you are handling components that are subject to ESD damage,
and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.

If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see Figure 63 on page
281) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the device with the other hand immediately
before inserting the component into the device.

WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD grounding
strap. The measurement must be in the range 1 through 10 Mohms.
Avertissement Par mesure de sécurité, vérifiez régulièrement la résistance du bracelet
antistatique. Cette valeur doit être comprise entre 1 et 10 mégohms (Mohms).

• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed from the device,
make sure the equipment end of your ESD wrist strap is attached to the ESD point on the chassis.

If no grounding strap is available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the device to ground yourself
before handling the component.

• Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing. ESD
voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.

• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage, always place it component-
side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an antistatic bag (see Figure 63 on
page 281). If you are returning a component, place it in an antistatic bag before packing it.
281

Figure 63: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag

CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as Category 5e and Category 6 can get

electrostatically charged. To dissipate this charge, always ground the cables to a suitable
and safe earth ground before connecting them to the system.
Attention Les câbles ANSI/TIA/EIA-568, par exemple Cat 5e et Cat 6, peuvent
emmagasiner des charges électrostatiques. Pour évacuer ces charges, reliez toujours les
câbles à une prise de terre adaptée avant de les raccorder au système.

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered devices:

• Note the following warnings printed on the device:

“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT ALL
POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”

“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. AFIN DE

PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON D'ALIMENTATION AVANT
DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
282

• AC-powered devices are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a grounding-type plug that
fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent this safety feature. Equipment grounding
must comply with local and national electrical codes.

• You must provide an external certified circuit breaker (2-pole circuit breaker or 4-pole circuit breaker
based on your device) rated minimum 20 A in the building installation.

• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the AC-powered device. The socket
outlet must be near the AC-powered device and be easily accessible.

• For devices that have more than one power supply connection, you must ensure that all power
connections are fully disconnected so that power to the device is completely removed to prevent
electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power cords (one for each power supply).

Power Cable Warning (Japanese)

WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

AC Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before working on the device or near power supplies, unplug all the power
cords from an AC-powered device.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient u
bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen.

Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään

asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.

Avertissement Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation

électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif.
283

Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten,
ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.

Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo di

alimentazione sulle unità CA.

Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de

fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada.

¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de

alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente alterna
(CA).

Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du för
växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

• A DC-powered device is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power requirements
of a maximally configured device.

• For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated
external to the equipment.

• For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.

• Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid central office earth ground.

• A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.

• Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.

• A DC-powered device that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for installation in a
restricted-access location. In the United States, a restricted-access area is one in accordance with
Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
284

NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker. This breaker
must protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth grounding faults in accordance
with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.

• Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions, connections with
reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment.

• The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered device is the nominal voltage associated
with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the
charging function.

• Because the device is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive lead to the terminal
labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the earth ground to the device
grounding points.

DC Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure that power is
removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker
on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF
position, and tape the device handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te
verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar de
UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de
UIT positie vast.

Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden

suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-
asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.

Avertissement Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier

que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le
disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le
285

disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée
du disjoncteur en position OFF.

Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie
den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.

Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il
circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito
CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale
posizione.

Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet

likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og
teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.

Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou a

fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar que
toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de
corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição a
manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.

¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda
la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que
alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la
posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en
posición de Apagado (OFF).

Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att

strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning är
BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen och
tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
286

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning

An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded branch
circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch
circuit that supplies the device. The grounding conductor is a separately derived system at the supply
transformer or motor generator set.

WARNING: When you install the device, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste
worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.

Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja

maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.

Avertissement Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être

connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt
und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento

a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.

Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles sist.

Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada, e
a última a ser desligada.

¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.

Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
kopplas bort sist.

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning

WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then –48 V to –
287

48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN
to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire must always be connected
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN naar
+RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en –48 naar –
48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten

+RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten – 48 V,
+RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.

Avertissement Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets

appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage
est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à –48 V. En débranchant la
puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 V à –48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié
pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché
pour la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et
débranché pour la dernière fois.

Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ringösen an das DC Netzteil
anzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss, +RTN
zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenz zum Abtrennen der
Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN und dann Erdanschluss zu
Erdanschluss. Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss immer zuerst angeschlossen und
als letztes abgetrennt wird.

Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC

usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta
sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e da
negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre
venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V til –
48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN, jord til jord.

Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el
extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado se
muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces –48 V a –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la
secuencia apropiada del cableado es –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió para
moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y
desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre
primero y desconectar por último.
288

¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados nan

EXtremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é
moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a
seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer.
Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por
último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e
desconectado por último.

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till –48 V.
Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till jord.

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning

WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such
as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations must be the
appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken
die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of het
grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten
dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de
geleider vast te klemmen.

Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,

esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt
kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee
puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.

Avertissement Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et
doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.

Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene

Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig, mit
nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die
angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter
festklemmen.
289

Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a
occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la
misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.

Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente

ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med
oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til
ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido, use
terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito fechado e
planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de cabo deverão
ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão prender
simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.

¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables

homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de
conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para
los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor.

Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,

t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa
kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen
och ledaren fastklämda.

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning

WARNING: The network device has more than one power supply connection. All
connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely.
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle
verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid
volledig te verwijderen.

Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät on

irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.
290

Avertissement Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d'alimentation. Pour

supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons d'alimentation doivent
être débranchés.

Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom gänzlich
von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein.

Avvertenza Questa unità ha più di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico; tutte le
connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l'elettricità dall'unità.

Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må kobles helt
fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.

Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de alimentação de
energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia, deverão ser
desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.

¡Atención! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de alimentación; para
eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse completamente todas las
conexiones.

Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla anslutningar

måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är fullständigt bruten.

TN Power Warning

WARNING: The device is designed to work with a TN power system.

Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN
energiesystemen.

Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.

Avertissement Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes

d'alimentation TN.

Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.

Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN.

Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.

291

Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.

¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo TN.

Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN-

typ.

Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Compliance Statement for Argentina | 292

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes EX Series
switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

These hardware devices comply with the following standards:

• Safety

• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment

• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 62368-1 Information Technology Equipment

• UL 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment

• UL 62368-1 Second Edition

• EN 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment

• EN 62368-1 Second Edition

• IEC 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment

• IEC 62368-1 Second Edition

• EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment classification and requirements

• EMC

• FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A (USA)

292

• EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)

• ICES-003 Class A

• VCCI Class A (Japan)

• AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)

• CISPR 22 Class A

• EN 55024

• EN 300386

• EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics

• EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker

• EN 61000-4-2 ESD

• EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

• EN 61000-4-4 EFT

• EN 61000-4-5 Surge

• EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity

• EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags

Compliance Statement for Argentina

EQUIPO DE USO IDÓNEO.

293

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for

EX Series Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Canada | 293

Taiwan | 294

European Community | 294

Israel | 295

Japan | 295

Korea | 295

United States | 296

FCC Part 15 Statement | 296

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes EX Series
switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

This topic describes the EMC requirements for these hardware devices.

Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. Industry
Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users’ satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the equipment to
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single line
individual service can be extended by means of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be
294

aware that compliance with the above conditions might not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility

designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, might give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.

CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by

themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as
appropriate.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution might be particularly important in rural areas.

Taiwan

此為甲類資訊技術設備。於一般家居環境使用時，本設備可能導致射頻干擾，用戶請採取相應措施。

The preceding translates as follows:

This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment, this device might cause radio interference, in which
case the user needs to take adequate measures.

European Community

This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device might cause radio interference, in which
case the user needs to take adequate measures.
295

Israel

The preceding translates as follows:

Warning: This product is Class A. In residential environments, the product may cause radio interference,
and in such a situation, the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Japan

The preceding translates as follows:

This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device might cause radio interference, in which
case the user needs to take adequate measures.

VCCI-A

Korea
296

The preceding translates as follows:

This equipment is Industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and seller or user
should take notice of it, and this equipment is to be used in the places except for home

United States

The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users need to
correct the interference at their own expense.

FCC Part 15 Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, might cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.

297

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX

Series Switches

This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes EX Series
switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A)

oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779

Translation: The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779.

Ex 3300
No ratings yet
Ex 3300
263 pages
Thiết bị switch Layer 2
No ratings yet
Thiết bị switch Layer 2
315 pages
Ex2300 Series
No ratings yet
Ex2300 Series
314 pages
Ex 2300
No ratings yet
Ex 2300
312 pages
Juniper Ex2200
No ratings yet
Juniper Ex2200
264 pages
Ex2200 PDF
No ratings yet
Ex2200 PDF
268 pages
Thiết bị Switch Layer 3
No ratings yet
Thiết bị Switch Layer 3
191 pages
Ex 4600
No ratings yet
Ex 4600
189 pages
Ex 4100
No ratings yet
Ex 4100
272 pages
Complete Hardware Guide For EX3300 Ethernet Switches
No ratings yet
Complete Hardware Guide For EX3300 Ethernet Switches
212 pages
Book HW Ex3200
No ratings yet
Book HW Ex3200
270 pages
Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 Ethernet Switches: Published: 2012-03-17 Revision 6
No ratings yet
Complete Hardware Guide For EX3200 Ethernet Switches: Published: 2012-03-17 Revision 6
258 pages
Ex4300 Juniper
No ratings yet
Ex4300 Juniper
332 pages
Manual Juniper
No ratings yet
Manual Juniper
242 pages
SwitchX 36-Port QSFP 40Gb/s Ethernet System Hardware User Manual
No ratings yet
SwitchX 36-Port QSFP 40Gb/s Ethernet System Hardware User Manual
70 pages
Ex 4500
No ratings yet
Ex 4500
338 pages
GUID
No ratings yet
GUID
429 pages
Juniper Ex4550
No ratings yet
Juniper Ex4550
324 pages
EXOS30 HWInstall
No ratings yet
EXOS30 HWInstall
526 pages
Quick Start Ex4600
No ratings yet
Quick Start Ex4600
10 pages
X435 QuickReference
No ratings yet
X435 QuickReference
2 pages
Ex8208 PDF
No ratings yet
Ex8208 PDF
314 pages
Extreme Networks Install Manual See PG 122 and On For Rack Info
No ratings yet
Extreme Networks Install Manual See PG 122 and On For Rack Info
385 pages
ECS2100-Series IG R01 20151229 F
No ratings yet
ECS2100-Series IG R01 20151229 F
51 pages
ConfiguringEX 2ed PDF
100% (1)
ConfiguringEX 2ed PDF
82 pages
Day One - Configuring Ex Series Ethernet Switches - 2nd Edition
100% (1)
Day One - Configuring Ex Series Ethernet Switches - 2nd Edition
82 pages
DO ConfiguringEX
No ratings yet
DO ConfiguringEX
94 pages
Juniper EX2200 Switch Guide
No ratings yet
Juniper EX2200 Switch Guide
8 pages
Ex2200 Juniper
No ratings yet
Ex2200 Juniper
26 pages
EX Series UpRunning PDF
No ratings yet
EX Series UpRunning PDF
291 pages
EX4650 Switch Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
EX4650 Switch Quick Start Guide
16 pages
Configuring EX Series Switches
100% (1)
Configuring EX Series Switches
82 pages
POE Switches User Manual
No ratings yet
POE Switches User Manual
1 page
ECS4210-12T 12-Port Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch: Installation Guide
No ratings yet
ECS4210-12T 12-Port Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch: Installation Guide
48 pages
Quick Start Guide: Arista Networks
No ratings yet
Quick Start Guide: Arista Networks
52 pages
AS5610-52X 48-Port 10G Top-of-Rack Switch: Installation Guide
No ratings yet
AS5610-52X 48-Port 10G Top-of-Rack Switch: Installation Guide
62 pages
800-0002-TR32 Traverse Install and Config
No ratings yet
800-0002-TR32 Traverse Install and Config
380 pages
ExtremeXOS Feature License Requirements
No ratings yet
ExtremeXOS Feature License Requirements
22 pages
Hardware Guide Netgear
No ratings yet
Hardware Guide Netgear
31 pages
Interfaces Ethernet Switches
No ratings yet
Interfaces Ethernet Switches
1,600 pages
System Monitoring On EX2300, EX3400, and EX4300 Switches: Release
No ratings yet
System Monitoring On EX2300, EX3400, and EX4300 Switches: Release
612 pages
Thiết bị Core Switch
No ratings yet
Thiết bị Core Switch
307 pages
Extremeswitching 200 Series: Initial Configuration and Setup
No ratings yet
Extremeswitching 200 Series: Initial Configuration and Setup
19 pages
Interfaces Ethernet Switches
No ratings yet
Interfaces Ethernet Switches
405 pages
DVS-Managed M EN 20131030
No ratings yet
DVS-Managed M EN 20131030
173 pages
Network Admin Switch Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Network Admin Switch Setup Guide
70 pages
Clear-Com Eclipse Matrix Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Clear-Com Eclipse Matrix Installation Manual
89 pages
Day One Configuring EX Switches - Juniper Networkspdf
No ratings yet
Day One Configuring EX Switches - Juniper Networkspdf
82 pages
AS4610 Guide Tutorial
No ratings yet
AS4610 Guide Tutorial
3 pages
Juniper - EX3400 Switch
No ratings yet
Juniper - EX3400 Switch
12 pages
Quick Start Ex3200 Ex4200 PDF
No ratings yet
Quick Start Ex3200 Ex4200 PDF
2 pages
Eki7428g Series
No ratings yet
Eki7428g Series
160 pages
qfx10002 Juniper Core Switch PDF
No ratings yet
qfx10002 Juniper Core Switch PDF
225 pages
SICOM3024 Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual - V2.3
No ratings yet
SICOM3024 Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual - V2.3
31 pages
1.12.02.0121-0-SICOM3000 (V2.1) Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual - V1.0
No ratings yet
1.12.02.0121-0-SICOM3000 (V2.1) Industrial Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Manual - V1.0
40 pages
Resume 1-Pharm 1 PG
No ratings yet
Resume 1-Pharm 1 PG
2 pages
7 Steps To Create Systems That Will Change Your Life
No ratings yet
7 Steps To Create Systems That Will Change Your Life
6 pages
C Programming Quiz for Beginners
No ratings yet
C Programming Quiz for Beginners
18 pages
HydroFS User Guide for Developers
100% (1)
HydroFS User Guide for Developers
4 pages
Angelica (Angelica Archangelica)
No ratings yet
Angelica (Angelica Archangelica)
10 pages
Dutch Flower Industry Analysis
No ratings yet
Dutch Flower Industry Analysis
13 pages
Harmonic Reduction in VSI: SVPWM vs SPWM
No ratings yet
Harmonic Reduction in VSI: SVPWM vs SPWM
5 pages
Sade Assignment Full
No ratings yet
Sade Assignment Full
12 pages
Ahmed Radwan 1-1
No ratings yet
Ahmed Radwan 1-1
3 pages
Cumulative Test 1-9 A: Grammar
No ratings yet
Cumulative Test 1-9 A: Grammar
6 pages
Hektoen Enteric Agar (HEA) : S Indicator: Ferric Ammonium Citrate (Producing Black Precipitate Due
No ratings yet
Hektoen Enteric Agar (HEA) : S Indicator: Ferric Ammonium Citrate (Producing Black Precipitate Due
3 pages
Winterhalter Glasswasher Operating Instructions Gs202 Gs215
No ratings yet
Winterhalter Glasswasher Operating Instructions Gs202 Gs215
19 pages
Lecture Notes On Topological Insulators: Zyuzin and Burkov 2012
No ratings yet
Lecture Notes On Topological Insulators: Zyuzin and Burkov 2012
3 pages
BMC Control-M For ZOS 9.0.19 User Guide
100% (1)
BMC Control-M For ZOS 9.0.19 User Guide
846 pages
Nutrition For Preschool-Age Children
50% (2)
Nutrition For Preschool-Age Children
57 pages
Core House - Neue Nationalgalarie
No ratings yet
Core House - Neue Nationalgalarie
46 pages
T S Eliot Poems
No ratings yet
T S Eliot Poems
9 pages
IC Scrum Project Management Gantt Chart Template 10578 Excel 2000 2004
No ratings yet
IC Scrum Project Management Gantt Chart Template 10578 Excel 2000 2004
6 pages
Lonely Planet Oman UAE Arabian Peninsula 6th Edition Lonely Planet Instant Download
100% (1)
Lonely Planet Oman UAE Arabian Peninsula 6th Edition Lonely Planet Instant Download
138 pages
Business Pressure
No ratings yet
Business Pressure
7 pages
Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System For Natural Disaster Management
No ratings yet
Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System For Natural Disaster Management
3 pages
Quick Study Guide To The Endocrine System
No ratings yet
Quick Study Guide To The Endocrine System
11 pages
rs485 Manual
No ratings yet
rs485 Manual
9 pages
Research 1232
No ratings yet
Research 1232
81 pages
Mobile Tech Resume 3 31 2017
No ratings yet
Mobile Tech Resume 3 31 2017
2 pages
Greške Po Standardu Bogdan 08 11 22
No ratings yet
Greške Po Standardu Bogdan 08 11 22
34 pages
MHD Power Generation
No ratings yet
MHD Power Generation
15 pages
B.Tech Semester 7 Results
No ratings yet
B.Tech Semester 7 Results
2 pages
VAP Prevention in Critical Care
No ratings yet
VAP Prevention in Critical Care
8 pages
Essay On Criticism
67% (3)
Essay On Criticism
5 pages